Home

Copy/Print/Scan User's Guide

Contents

1. Left ADJ Tray 1 Duplex Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 2nd Image Simplex Pass Plain Paper Transfer Current Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Manual Plain Paper Duplex Thick 1 Thick 2 Postcard Envelope Label Admin Settings 3 37 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Thick Paper Cyan Image Density Magenta Yellow Black Monochrome Density Adj Fine Line ADJ AIDC Mode Thick Mode Engine Engine DipSwW DipSW 1 Engine DipSW 2 Engine DipSW 3 Engine DipSW 26 Engine DipSW 27 Engine DipSW 28 3 38 Admin Settings tination Input Hide Personal Data Disable Job History Display Restrict Scan to USB Main Scan Main Scan Adjust Page Scan Adjust Yellow Value Magenta Cyan Supplies Consumables Tranfer Belt Replace Unit Transfer Roller Unit Fusing Un
2. sssesssssesssssssssssssssessssscssessessssessessessssssssessensensessessees 14 6 Kit Contentswis tact a e a A a aA EA dees 14 6 Installing a Working Table WT POL sseesesessssseseeessssierererseseerersesesreressererresesrererees 14 7 x 14 Contents Logging in to this machine ccsceccscscscsssscssssesscescssesseseeseseeseacescssesseseasesseecaseees 15 6 When Card Authentication is enabled cccccsccscessesseceecesseeeecesseeseeesseseeesees 15 7 When Card Authentication Password is enabled 0 ce eeeeeseeereeecneeeeeeenees 15 7 ADDENGIXS ia ticcitech deren a need dint nit nie hed A 1 Technical specifications cscssssssssssssessersessesessessessesssessssssssesesssseesessessecsseseeseers A 2 Consumable Life Expectancy Chart cccccccecsscsscssessensenseeseeseeseesceseeseneeeeeseeeeees A 6 USser Replaceable sec c c ccesediececescevecncitechestcatcsicesdusdosduade see sensdnscosdbscesdvacesabees A 6 Service Replaceable ccccceccessescesseseeeeeeeceeceeceeceaesaeeaesaecsecaecaecaeeseeaeeaeeaeeseees A 7 TOXCUNP Ul 20cssessessesecseosecseossossossossossosessoosoonesaesdssasseesdeoaesevencsnosassastensestendesaasdooacossonsoess A 8 Entering textarea ore e A E E A e aa A 8 Our Concern for Environmental Protection csscsccssessscssecsssssecsssecesssseseseoes A 9 What is an ENERGY STAR product seseeeseeeeseeseeerersesrsrerstrrerersererreresrereee A 9 Conte
3. Select whether to allow text and images in a document to be copied Allow or to prohibit it Restrict Performing Scan to E mail mode operations 10 11 Specifying communication settings The Communication parameters available from the Settings screen can be used to specify settings for E mail transmissions Binary Division Select whether or not transmission data is divided Item Description ON Select this setting to divide transmission data OFF Select this setting to not divide transmission data The setting specified with Admin Settings Ethernet Binary Division is given priority Admin Setting E mail Encryption Description Settings ON OFF Specify settings for E mail encryption Send Use Signature Description Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a digital signature is applied to E mail messages E mail Specify the subject and address of E mail messages Item Description File Name Type in the document name for the scan data Subject Type in the subject for E mail messages 10 12 Performing Scan to E mail mode operations Item Description From Specify the sender s address Select Administrator E mail Addr or User Address or type it in directly Body Type in the body text for the E mail message Performing Scan to E
4. No Indication Description Print Press to display a screen listing the print jobs 2 Send Press to display a screen listing the transmission jobs 3 Receive Press to display a screen listing the reception jobs Active Log Press to display screens listing the jobs currently being performed or the job log 5 Job list Displays the list of jobs The job number user name and job status can be checked 6 Delete Press to delete the selected job Next press Yes then OK Bey When the job log is displayed Details appears To view job details press Details 7 a Press to return to the home screen 2 10 Touch panel screens Status screen 0 50 100 Cyan Toner Magenta Toner Yellow Toner Black Toner 12 12 2009 07 45 No Indication Description 1 Consumables Press to display a screen showing the status of con sumables Bey The percentages remaining for the consumables may be different from the actual amounts and should be used only as reference 2 Device info Press to display a screen showing the information of devices 3 gt Press to return to the home screen Touch panel screens 2 11 USB HDD screen 1 2 Select desired sditing Proof Print External aa ID amp Print 3 4 No Indication Description 1 Proof Print Press to print a print job saved on hard disk User Name Select a
5. Type in the fax number of this machine up to 20 characters The information specified here is printed as the trans mitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents Fax Settings Admin Settings Header Footer Settings Item Description Header Position Settings Inside Body Text Outside Body Text OFF Select the position for the transmitting subscriber identification added to documents sent from this machine The added transmitting subscriber identification is printed as a part of the image in the received docu ment If OFF is selected the transmitting subscriber infor mation is not added For 120V model OFF is not available Bes When transmitting subscriber identification is added while sending Internet faxes the information is added inside the document regardless of the selected setting Fax TX Header Name Settings ON OFF Select the information added as the transmitting sub scriber identification ON Adds the sender s name recipient s fax num ber To xxxxx date time that transmission begins communication number and page number total num ber of pages as the transmitting subscriber identifica tion OFF Adds the sender s name sender s fax num ber date time that transmission begins communica tion number and page number total number of pages as the transmitting subscriber identification
6. S MIME Comm Setting Enabled Digital Signature Encryption Method Auto Obtain Certificates Print S MIME Information External Memory Print Job Timeout Copy Settings Specify Tray When APS OFF Paper Priority Print Settings Startup Page Setting Auto Continue Paper Default Paper Size Paper Custom Size Width Length Paper Type Measurement Unit Setting Admin Settings 3 27 Hold Job Timeout Quality Color Mode Settings Brightness Halftone Image Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Edge Image Enhancement Printing Text Printing Graphics Printing Edge Strength Economy Print PCL Settings Contrast Image RGB Source Printing _ RGB Intent _ RGB Gray Text Printing RGB Source RGB Intent _ RGB Gray 3 28 Admin Settings E Graphics Printing RGB Source RGB Intent _ RGB Gray PS Settings Image Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Destination Profile Text Printing RGB Source RGB Intent RGB Gray Destination Profile Graphics Printing RGB Source RGB In
7. Paper Zoom The image size for the document can be enlarged or reduced Item Description E Specify the zoom ratio of the copy 25 0 to 400 0 With documents loaded into the ADF the zoom ratio can be set between 25 and 200 Set Zoom The various preset zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the Minimal setting can be changed The zoom ratios can be set between 25 0 and 200 0 Zoom settings Select a preset zoom ratio or a programmed zoom ratio Auto Select this setting for the most appropriate zoom ratio to be automatically selected based on the size of the loaded document and the specified paper size Full Size Select this setting to produce a copy that is the same size as the document 100 0 Manual Press or to enter a custom zoom ratio Minimal Select this setting to print a copy of the document image so that it is slightly smaller than the original document size 7 6 Zoom Duplex Combine Whether the scanned document and the printed copy are printed on just one side or both sides can be specified In addition document images of multiple pages 2 or 4 pages can be combined and printed on a single page Item Description Duplex Select whether simplex single sided or duplex double sided copies are to be printed 1 gt 1 Select this setting to produce single sided copies from single sided documents 1 gt
8. SUB Address If the fax is to be sent using F codes specify the SUB address up to 20 digits This function can also be specified as a transmis sion condition when sending a fax For details refer to Specifying transmission condi tions on page 5 4 Sender ID If the fax is to be sent using F codes specify the sender ID up to 20 digits including numbers and This function can also be specified as a transmis sion condition when sending a fax For details refer to Specifying transmission condi tions on page 5 4 Cover Sheet Select this check box to specify cover sheet set tings This can also be specified when sending a fax For details refer to Creating a fax cover sheet on page 5 5 Phone Book Entry Click this button to edit the phone book For details refer to Using the phone book on page 5 15 5 10 Fax driver settings Bez When faxing with a timer transmission make sure that the time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine the fax will be sent on the following day Basic tab The settings available on the Basic tab are described below Item Description Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document to be sent Original Size Select the paper size of the original do
9. Address Registration Address Book Address Book Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output E mail Start Number Number of Addresses List Output FTP Start Number Number of Addresses List Output WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output SMB Start Number Number of Addresses List Output 3 22 Admin Settings L Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Group Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Program Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Output E mail Start Number Number of Addresses List Output FTP Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Admin Settings 3 23 WebDAV Start Number Number of Addresses List Output SMB Start Number Number of Addresses List Output Internet Fax Start Number Number of Addresses List Outpu
10. Item Description Restriction Code Settings Displays the list of inhibited codes of the OpenAPI connection applications New Registers new inhibited codes for the Index Code Vendor Code and Application Code 3 78 Admin Settings Media Handling 4 Print Media Specifications Media Media Size Tray Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter Letter 8 5 x 11 0 215 9 x 279 4 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Letter Plus 8 5 x 215 9 x 322 3 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No 12 69 Government 8 0 x 10 5 203 2 x 266 7 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No letter Legal 8 5 x 14 0 215 9 x 355 6 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Executive 7 25 x 184 2 x 266 7 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes No 10 5 Statement 5 8 5 139 7 x 215 9 1 2 No Yes Yes No 16K 7 7 x 10 6 195 0 x 270 0 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No UK Quarto 8 0 x 10 0 203 2 x 254 0 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No Foolscap 8 0 x 13 0 203 2 x 330 2 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No Government Legal 8 5 x 13 0 215 9 x 330 2 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes No Folio 8 25 x 210 0 x 330 0 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No 13 0 8 1 2 x 13 1 2 8 5 x 13 5 215 9 x 342 9 1 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 1 8 x 13 1 4 8 125 x 206 4 x 336 6 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No 13 25 A4 8 2 x 11 7 210 0 x 297 0 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes A5 5 9 x 8 3 148 0 x 210 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No B5 JIS 7 2 x 10 1 182 0 x 257 0 1 2 3 4 Yes Yes Yes No A6 4 15 8 105 0 x 148 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No B6 5 0 7 2 128 0 x 182 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No Photo size 4 x 6 4 0x6 0
11. 3 43 Authentication Setting oe 3 44 Copy Settings sesser 3 48 Bthermet s sisascsdiesetsrasesneapad eave sonoze canta 3 45 External Memory Print 0 0 00 3 48 Pax Settings 6c cfciscsievcssssadssssentesede 3 63 Folder Settings ccceeeeeeseeeeeees HDD Format oc sc c63 sessessesscassesssesecas Job TimeOut oi se cssesstosacsetussdvscsesessse Machine Settings s es Maintenance Ment a Paper Empty secsesessissireissei Print Settings oo ce eeseeeeeeeeee Restore Defaults c cece Security Settings s s s Associating the user with card using authentication device 15 6 C Configuring this machine 15 2 Consumables Backup Battery cece Fuser Unit 20 eeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeneeees Imaging Unit 000 eeeeeeeeeeeees Toner Cartridge Transfer Belt Unit Index Transfer Roller ccceeeeeseeees 11 22 Waste Toner Bottle 0 0 eee 11 19 Control panel cece 1 4 2 2 COPY mode srssrsopirrssssossississississiisssis 7 2 Color Mode 7 9 Density sissi 7 8 Duplex Combine 10 0 0 sees 7 7 Finishing s 250 senssetsrssaseeopaseeeesonsvesense 7 10 MD COPY carenes niai 7 13 Image Quality ccc cecseeseeeeeeeeees 7 15 Original Size sosna 7 4 Original Type Paper piesien Paper Margin Proof Copy sssiiuenpi ini aaaeien Separate Scan o on ZOOM r aed neheteeeues D Document feed tray ee Docu
12. Printing system Semiconductor laser beam scanning dry type electrophotographic method Developing system Dry mono component SMT developing system Fusing system Lower free belt fusing system Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi standard 600 dpi x 1200 dpi max 600 dpi x 300 dpi when using ADF Printing 600 dpix600 dpi Document Type Sheets books and other three dimen sional objects Size Maximum Legal Weight Maximum 3 kg First print Black and white color 12 9 seconds or less with plain A4 paper 12 8 seconds or less with plain Letter paper First copy Black and 10 1 seconds or less with plain Letter white A4 paper Color 12 seconds or less with plain Letter A4 paper Print speed copy speed Simples Plain A4 30 0 pages minute black sin paper and white color gle sided Letter 31 6 pages minute black and white color Thick A4 15 0 pages minute black paper and white color Letter 15 8 pages minute black and white color Duplex Plain A4 30 0 sides minute black dou paper and white color ble sided Letter 31 6 sides minute black and white color Technical specifications Warm up Time Time until the machine is ready to begin printing after being turned on at room temperature 23 C 120 V Avg 45 seconds 220 V Avg 45 seconds 240 V Avg 45 seconds Paper sizes Tray 1 manual feed tray Tr
13. Bes The recipient s address will not be added when sending Internet faxes even if ON is selected Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 9 Comm Settings Item Description Footer Position Settings Inside Body Text Outside Body Text RX Ft OFF Select the position for the reception information reception time and reception number printed in doc uments received by this machine If RX Ft OFF is selected the reception information is not printed Item Description PB DP Settings PB 10pps 20pps Select the dialing method according to the operating environment being used Bes The default setting differs depending on the setting selected for Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Target If Fax Target is set to a country that is not compatible with 20pps 20pps does not appear RX Mode Settings Auto RX Manual RX DRPD Select the reception method Auto RX Automatic reception Manual RX Manual reception Select this setting if an external telephone is connected and the phone line is often busy or if remote reception is to be used DRPD If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns available the incoming call is automatically received as a fax If DRPD is selected select the ring pattern for faxing with Ring Pattern Number of RX Call Rings S
14. 0 DOWD cssssseseesendavsait sasassass isons tesnecenenaetecaaes 7 2 I CUVG vsey sys apecgsedecet S 7 2 DOD eee e A 7 3 R Receiving G3 faxes 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeees 4 2 Automatic reception eee eee 4 2 L DRPD iisas Line Settings ee 3 13 Manual reception ECM OFF esaeen 3 13 Receiving Internet faxes 0 4 5 TX Confirm CSI ossessi 3 13 Redial sisiii c8 sce ceciiiaicecssanastenes 3 23 V AORE as 3 13 Remote reception cece 4 9 A 6 Index Reports nates ote Activity Report Broadcast Reservation REPOTM srpna tesiantvanesaens ats 7 10 Broadcast Result Report 0 7 9 I Fax RX Error Report 0 0 7 11 PC Fax TX Error Report 7 11 Reservation TX Report s s s 7 8 TX Result Report eee eeeeeeeeee 7 7 S Scan Settings 2 0 0 eee eeseeeeeeeees 3 11 Background Removal 00 3 12 Density sscsscssiceissrcssestcstsbavesdenss sissies 3 12 Original Type siessen 3 11 Resolution issicpessessrisirireisiiio 3 11 Separate Scan wee cece 3 11 Sharpness csisasceasedersredavseseeevesan cieseee 3 12 Sending faxes 0 eee 3 1 General operation cccceeeeeeeeees 3 2 Specifications 0 0 eeeeecereeeeeeee A 2 Specifying destinations 0 3 7 Direct Input risisisrsisessisisssresissisersiss 3 8 Favorites 0 ccceseeceeceeseeseeseeeeeseeeeeeees 3 7 LDAP Log Search T Text input oeenn A 4 Touch panel 0 000 eee cee
15. Bes Do not grab the bottom of the bag otherwise the imaging unit may be damaged resulting in decreased print quality 1 1 Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit Remove all packing tape from the imaging unit Replacing Consumables 11 15 1 2 Remove the paper from the imaging unit Remove the protective cover from the imaging unit D D d c v Ss pa Ss o ps N g x lt w O ES Go o So 22 26 6 gE co P or a O 20 are lt O and then install the imag ing unit in the machine ment 1 4 Press in on the waste toner bot g o amp a Q Q x Q T a 5 2 5 Replacing Consumables 11 16 1 5 Make sure that the toner car tridge is the same color as the machine compartment and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine Bey Fully insert the toner car tridge 1 6 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place Ees The front lever should be securely returned to its original position other wise the front cover of the machine cannot be closed Ng If it is difficult to operate the lever push it in Replacing Consumables 11 17 1 T Close the front cover Bey When closing the front cover press the area of the cover with small pro jections 11 18 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Wast
16. Select the color space for RGB text data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB text data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced RGB Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data Bk CMYK Gray CMYKkKy Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using only black Graphics Printing Specify settings for RGB graphics data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB Select the color space for RGB graphics data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB graphics data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced 3 54 Admin Settings RGB Gray Settings
17. Shows the time that the transmission was queued Start Time Shows the time that transmission will begin Prints Shows the number of pages that were scanned Note Shows remarks regarding the transmission For details check the margin of the report Printing reports lists Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions The Broadcast Result Report is printed automatically when a broadcast transmission is completed Bes With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report Broadcast Report whether or not to print the Broadcast Result Report can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Be With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report Broadcast Result Report the conditions for printing can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description Destination Shows the registration name or address of all des tinations for the broadcast transmission Start Time Shows the time that transmission began Time Shows the length of time required for transmis sion Prints Shows the number of pages sent Result Shows the results of the transmission For details check the margin of the report Note Shows remarks regarding the transmission For details check the margin of the report Printing reports list
18. Windows XP Server 2003 1 From the Start menu choose Printers and Faxes to display the Print ers and Faxes directory 2 Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences Windows 2000 1 From the Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers to dis play the Printers directory 2 Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose Printing Preferences Displaying Printer Driver Settings for Windows 5 5 Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver Common Buttons The buttons described below appear on each tab OK Click to exit the Properties dialog box saving any changes made Cancel Click to exit the Properties dialog box without saving any changes made Apply Click to save all changes without exiting the Properties dialog box Help Click to view the help Favorite Setting This allows the current settings to be saved To save the current settings specify the desired settings and then click Add Specify the settings described below and then click OK m Name Type in the name of the settings to be saved Em Icon Select an icon from the icon list to easily identify the settings The selected icon appears in the drop down list E Sharing Specify whether or not the settings to be saved can be used by other users logged
19. 0 ee 4 8 Address Book E mail Settings 20 00 00 eee 3 17 Address Registration a ADE inci b ich Biioteeaaeeeavtecvoteoototssaenies F Fax drive ssc s5 is 35 sissies ciessesoneretsensersensdts 5 8 C Authentication Canceling oo ececcsecsecseeeeeeeneeees 3 23 Account Track Closed network reception 4 7 BASiC geenien s Comm Method Configure F Code TX Favorite Setting Password TX FAX neess we Timer TX seceescscstestcsecsstsscssascaseis asc LAY OUb sis cesses tsdis cis cis theives cecnonsscee Comm Settings 05 3 13 3 14 Printing Preferences ceeeee 5 8 Control Panel cceeeseeseeseeneeee 1 3 PrOPOTtieS sie sc csi ccs cists aiaveseesevsecans 5 8 Settings oo ececeeseeseceecseceeeseeeeeeeeees 5 13 D Uninstall i scssssssssssedesseideasedseasetesses 5 19 Fax forwarding cc cceeeeseeseeeeees 4 8 DRIPD ete ssnssssssssctuvecctenssateessstdestencisseseates 4 4 Bax Geren ceo ete ete 1 8 Ring Pattern 00 ee eeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeees 4 4 Index A 5 Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 4 MAGUS OE E EET eeepc eee 7 5 Closed Network Address Book List ccceeeeeeee 7 12 RX Password cccccsecseeseeeeeeeeees 2 15 Fax Setup Information List 7 12 Comm Settngs sapipir iiss 2 10 Fax Factory Default 0 0 2 20 M Fax Function Settings 0 0 2 13 Fax Image Initialized 2 2 20 Machine P
20. Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data Bk CMYK Gray CMYKkKy Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYkK Black is reproduced using only black PS Settings Specify settings for PostScript printing Image Printing Specify settings for RGB image data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB AppleRGB AdobeRGB1998 ColorMatchRGB BlueAdjus tRGB Select the color space for RGB image data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Relative Color Absolute Color Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB image data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced Relative Color Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile Absolute Color Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile Admin Settings 3 55 RGB Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data Bk CMYK Gray CMYk Black is reproduced
21. Default Click the button to reset the settings to their defaults Bes This button does not appear on the Advanced tab Bey When this button is clicked the settings in the displayed dialog box are reset to their defaults The settings on other tabs are not changed Advanced Tab PostScript Printer Driver Only The Advanced Tab allows you to m Select whether to enable or disable the settings for advanced printing functions such as booklet printing Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5 7 Specify the PostScript output method Specify whether or not the error messages of a print job are printed Print a mirror image Specify whether or not the application can directly output PostScript data My Tab My Tab allows you to Display the most frequently used functions from each tab whose settings are often changed Add or remove displayed functions by clicking Edit My Tab In addition functions can be added to My Tab by right clicking them on their original tabs Basic Tab The Basic Tab allows you to K Specify the orientation of the media Specify the size of the original document Select the output media size Zoom expand reduce documents Specify the paper tray Specify the type of media Specify the number of copies Turn on off job collation Save a print job on the printer and print it later Job Retention Save a confidential job on the printer and protect it with a passwo
22. Dest Check Display Func Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the list of specified destinations is printed before the fax is sent Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 13 Item Description Cofirm Addr TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when directly typing in the address Requiring that the address be entered twice reduces misdirected faxes caused by the address being mistyped Cofirm Addr Regis ter Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the destination address must be entered a second time for confirmation when reg istering destinations Requiring that the address be entered twice prevents incorrect programming caused by the address being mistyped Restrict Fax TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax transmis sions Restrict Fax RX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit G3 fax receptions Restrict PC Fax TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit PC fax transmis sions Restrict Internet Fax TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit transmission of Inter net faxes Restrict Internet Fax RX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit reception of Internet faxes Fax
23. Memory Full Insufficient memory Cancel the job The print data sent from the computer has caused the memory to become full Cancel the job Stored Job Error Stored job specification not correct Tray x Tray 3 Tray 4 was specified for printing a stored job when Tray 3 Tray 4 is not installed on the machine When trying to print a stored job the installed memory had been changed since the job was stored Install Tray 3 Tray 4 or install the memory that had been installed when the job was stored Job Registration Limit Over Registered jobs reached limit Wait for job registration to complete Copy scan or fax transmission operations were repeated while printing or transmissions could not be performed Wait a while The error is canceled Status error and service messages 13 43 Message Cause Solution Check Scanner Lock Lever Unlock the scanner lock lever The scanner is locked Cancel the job Unlock the scanner For details refer to Unlocking the Scan ner on page 13 3 Place Original on Glass Unable to scan from ADF with this original size The selected document size cannot be scanned from the ADF Place the document on the original glass if it has a size that cannot be scanned from the ADF Place Original on ADF Place originals on the Document Feeder The document is
24. Original Size on page 7 4 When sorting or making double sided or combined copies using the original glass press Finish after all pages of the document have been scanned A screen showing the scanned document appears after the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key is pressed Check that the docu ment was scanned as desired Number Of Originals Number of scanned document pages Number Of Sets Number of scanned copies specified number of copies Printed TTL Pgs Number of copy pages printed total number of pages to be printed Does not appear during a Separate Scan opera tion Ng For details on interrupted printing Interrupt Mode refer to Interrupt ing a copy job on page 8 2 Basic copy operation 7 3 es For details on copying using stored settings refer to Copy programs on page 8 3 Bes A document containing pages of different sizes can be loaded into the ADF For details on copying documents with pages of different sizes refer to Original Size on page 7 4 Original Size The document size can be specified Item Description Standard Size Select the size of the document Select Letter Legal to copy a document containing differ ent page sizes Custom Size Specify the size of the document if it is a non standard size Press X and Y and then type in the document size X can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm 1 18 in
25. Paper on page 7 5 Other Media When loading media other than plain paper set the media mode Envelope Label Letterhead Thick 1 Thick 2 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 or Postcards in the driver for optimum print quality 4 16 Loading Media Loading Envelopes 1 Open Tray 1 2 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space between them 3 Press down on the center of the paper lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs white lock into place Loading Media 4 17 4 Load the envelopes flap side up in the tray Be Before loading enve lopes press them down to make sure that all air is removed and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed other wise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a media misfeed may occur Up to 10 envelopes can be loaded into the tray at one time For envelopes with the flap along the long edge Envelope C6 Envelope Monarch Envelope You 6 Envelope You 2 and Envelope DL load the envelopes with the flap side up 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the envelopes 4 18 Loading Media 6 Select Copy Paper Tray 1 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also Loading Label Sheets Letterhead Postcards Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Open Tray 1 2 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space bet
26. Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it Solving Problems with Printing Quality 13 31 Symptom Cause Solution Image is too Laser lens is dirty Clean the laser lens light there is The copy density is Select a darker copy density lowimage set too light density The media is moist from humidity Remove the moist media and replace with new dry media There is not much toner left in the car tridge Replace the toner cartridge One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it Media type is set incorrectly When printing envelopes labels letter head postcards thick stock glossy media single side only paper or spe cial paper specify the appropriate media type in the printer driver Image is too dark Printer Printer Printer Printer The copy density is set too dark Select a lighter copy density The document was not pressed close enough against the original glass Position the document so that it is pressed close enough against the orig inal glass For details on positioning the document on the original glass refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged
27. Subject Enter the subject of the fax to be sent up to 64 characters Date Specify the date Select a specific format or enter the date as desired up to 20 characters Pages Specify the number of pages to be sent Comment Enter the text that will appear in the comment box up to 640 characters A line break is counted as two characters Recipient tab Item Description Standard Select this to use the preset text Details Select this to specify details under Recipi ent Setting Details at the bottom of the dia log box Load with Joint Name Select this to add the individual recipients in a group destination The contents of Recip ient List in the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box are added Change Each Recipient Select this to change the information for the recipients The information for the contents of Recipient List in the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box are changed Load Set Informa tion Select this to add the information entered in the Company Department Name and FAX Number boxes up to 80 characters Click Read to import the information for the first recipient into the boxes Sending a PC fax Sender tab Item Description Sender Information Set tings Enter the appropriate sender information in the Company Department Name Phone FAX Number and E mail boxes Select the chec
28. cscsssssssssersersersersersesssssssecsesssessessessscssessessessessessesseseeseaseess 5 8 Printing Preferences dialog DOK cece seeseeseseeseeersceseseeseseeseseneneceaeseeecneseeees 5 8 Properties idialog BOX sinesine costes E Ee aE ITEE EERS 5 8 Comon SettiN gs a a A A a aaas 5 9 EAX tab e deka E oi ea ies ae 5 10 Basic tab vessecetecessssesatssuslssustesctelted mannan iia a E EN EE ETA 5 11 Authentication Account Track dialog DOX cece eeeeeeeecneeeceeeeeteeseeeeeeees 5 12 Layout tabs siaaciestavsciteclvus A Configure tab Settings tab eee Saving fax driver setting S s erie a eA E E EEE pant A TE Saving the Settings 0 00 cececcecesceeceeeeeseesecsecsecaeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeaeeeeseeeees Editing Settings ccccescessescessesseeseescescesceseeseeseesceseceeceeceeceeceaesaeeaeeaecneeaeeneenes Using the phone book sccsscsscsesssssrssrsessssssesseeseeseeseesesssesscsscssessessessesensecsesseese Adding recipients to a phone book Editing a phone book ceeee Changing personal information x 6 Contents Changing group membership ccceccecsesssssesseeececceeceeceseeseeaecaecaecaecaeeneeneenee 5 17 Changing a group name 13 17 Creating a folder eee 5 17 Searching for personal information we 217 Receiving a PC fax scscsssssessesecsesecseees 5 18 Using received document ccccssecsesscescesceseeseeseeseceeceaeeseese
29. or until the desired tab appears To select a group destination press Group Specifying destinations 3 7 3 Select the destination and then press OK To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission select all destinations where the fax is to be sent Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name 1 In the initial Fax screen press A 2 Press Search 3 Select the search method Type Select the destination type Fax E mail etc Name Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for Type in the name to be searched for and then press OK to display a list of the search results 4 Select the destination and then press OK To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission select all destinations where the fax is to be sent 5 Press OK Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine directly type in the address Be If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Direct Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in G3 fax 1 In the initial Fax screen press Direct Input 2 Press Fax 3 Type in the fax number Tone Press to send push button tones when pulse dialing is being used T appears in the screen Pause Press to insert a pause when di
30. 101 6 x 152 4 1 2 No Yes Yes No Photo size 10 x 15 4 0x 6 0 101 6 x 152 4 1 2 No Yes Yes No Photo size E size 3 2 x 4 6 82 5 117 0 No Yes Yes No Photo size L size 3 5 x 5 0 89 0 x 127 0 No Yes Yes No Photo size 9 x 13 3 5 x 5 1 90 0 x 130 0 No Yes Yes No Photo size 13 x 18 5 1 x 7 1 130 0 x 180 0 No Yes Yes No Photo size 3 x 5 3 0 x 5 0 76 2 x 127 0 No Yes Yes No Photo size 2 25 x 57 1 x 82 5 No Yes Yes No 2 1 4 x 3 1 4 3 29 J Postcard 3 9 x 5 8 100 0 x 148 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No Double Postcard 5 8 x 7 9 148 0 x 200 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No B5 ISO 6 9 x 9 8 176 0 x 250 0 1 No Yes Yes No Envelope Com10 4 125 x 104 8 x 241 3 1 No No No No 9 5 Envelope Monarch eee 190 5 x 98 4 1 No No No No Print Media Media Media Size Tray Duplex Copy Scan FAX Inch Millimeter Envelope You 6 7 5 x 190 5 x 98 4 1 No No No No 3 875 Envelope DL 8 7 4 3 220 0 x 110 0 1 No No No No Envelope C6 6 44 5 162 0 x 114 0 1 No No No No Envelope You 2 6 4 4 5 162 0 x 114 0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou 3 4 7 x 9 2 120 0 x 235 0 1 No No No No Envelope Chou 4 3 5 x 8 1 90 0 x 205 0 1 No No No No Kai 16 7 3 x 10 2 185 0 x 260 0 1 2 Yes Yes Yes No Kai 32 5 1 7
31. 13 25 Solving Other Problems Symptom Cause Solution Machine The power cord is not Turn off the machine confirm that the power is not correctly plugged into power cord is correctly plugged into on the outlet the outlet and then turn on the machine Something is wrong Plug another electrical appliance into with the outlet con _ the outlet and see whether it operates nected to the properly machine The power switch is Turn the power switch off O position not correctly turned then turn it back to the on I position on I position The machine is con Use a power source with the specifica nected to an outlet tions listed in appendix A Technical with a voltage or fre Specifications quency that does not match the machine specifications The control One of the toner car Remove the toner cartridges and panel dis tridges may be defec check for damage If it is damaged plays Toner tive replace it is low much Printed with heavy See specifications in Appendix A sooner than toner coverage expected Cannot print The tray is empty Check that at least Tray 1 is loaded the machine with media in place and secure status list There is a media mis Clear the media misfeed feed 13 26 Solving Other Problems Symptom Cause Solution Printing from a USB mem ory device is not possible External Memory Print is set to Di
32. Fax Settings Admin Settings Remote RX Remote RX Settings Enabled Remote RX No PC Fax RX PC Fax RX Settings Setting PC Fax RX Print Nighttime RX Night Fax RX Settings Print Night RX Start Time Night RX End Time PBX Connection Settings PBX Function PBX Number Fax Report Activity Report TX Result Report TX Result Report Image TX Reserve PC Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Report Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Screen Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 7 Settings 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Admin Settings 3 Type in the administrator password Default 12345678 and then press OK E l Fax RX Error Report List Print Fax Setup Pg Fax Target Fax Factory Default Fax Image Initialized The Admin Setting screen appears 4 Press Fax Settings The Fax Settings screen appears Be All factory default values are shown in bold Sender Settings Item Description Sender Type in the sender s this machine s name up to 30 bytes The information specified here is printed as the trans mitting subscriber identification in the header of sent documents Sender Fax No
33. Label Envelope Postcard Letterhead Glossy 1 Glossy 2 1 Side Only Spe cial Paper Select the paper type ting Measurement Unit Set Settings Inch mm Select the measurement units 3 50 Admin Settings Hold Job Timeout Settings Disable 1 Hour 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week Specify the length of time until print jobs saved on the hard disk are deleted If Disable is selected print jobs are not deleted at a specific time Quality Settings Specify settings for the print quality Color Mode Settings Color Mode Gray Scale Color Mode The pages are printed in full color Gray Scale The pages are printed in black and white Brightness Settings 15 to 15 Default 0 The brightness of the printed image can be adjusted Halftone Select how halftones in images text and graphics are reproduced Image Printing Settings Line Art Detail Smooth Select how halftones in images are repro duced Line Art Halftones are reproduced with high precision Detail Halftones are reproduced with detail Smooth Halftones are reproduced with smoothness Text Printing Settings Line Art Detail Smooth Select how halftones in text are reproduced Line Art Halftones are reproduced with high precision Det
34. Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings m Mode Settings Select Basic Mode for specifying basic settings or select Advanced Mode for specifying detailed settings The settings that can be specified differ for each mode When Basic Mode is selected The following parameters can be set when Basic Mode is selected Help icon Click to display Help information m About icon Click to display the software version information m Scan Objective Specify the document type m Scan Type Specify the scan type m Resolution Specify the resolution m Auto Color Adjustment Specify the auto color adjustment settings m Auto Deskew Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image m Paper source Specify the paper source When scanning documents from the ADF select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document m Original Size Specify the original size m Rotation Select the orientation of the image to be scanned Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings Bes If the Rotate back side check box is selected the back side of the image is rotated 180 and scanned Applies only if ADF 2 sided is selected E Image size Shows the data size of the scan image m Close Click to close the TWAIN driver window m Prescan Click to begin scanning a preview image m Scan Click to begin scanning Clear icon Click to erase the preview image
35. Press Register At Name enter the name Oo oO At Dest specify the destination Press RJ select the address book or group destinations and then press OK Press OK N 6 6 Registering a program destination Communication management Checking a job From the Job screen the status of transmission reception jobs and results of jobs can be viewed In the home screen press Job to display the Job screen Job gt Active gt Send Select job No UserName Status T lagaisica YEAMTCEK 000 000 Rp 08 24 2009 19 03 Ees For details on the Job screen refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide Checking jobs being performed A list of jobs currently being performed appears when the initial Job screen is displayed If the job log is displayed press Active to display the list of jobs currently being performed Transmission jobs Press Send to view the list of jobs queued for redialing and queued for transmission To delete a job select the job from the list and then press Delete Reception jobs Press Receive to view the list of jobs being received and queued for recep tion To delete a job select the job from the list and then press Delete Checking a job Checking the job log Press Log in the Job screen to display the job log Transmission jobs Press Send to view the log for transmission jobs To view job details sele
36. Prints a report for each destina tion if transmission could not be completed even after redialing TX Result Report Screen Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to request confirmation for printing a transmission results report before beginning the transmission I Fax RX Error Report Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to print a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails List Print Item Description Fax Setup Pg Settings Print Cancel A list of fax related settings will be printed To print press Print and then press OK Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 19 Fax Target Description Settings U S A Canada Mexico Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Ireland Italy The Netherlands Nor way Poland Portugal Spain Sweden Swit zerland The U K Russia Argentina Brazil South Africa Australia New Zealand China Hong Kong Malaysia Singapore Korea Tai wan Israel Japan Saudi Arabia Turkey Hungary Slovakia Vietnam The Czech Republic The Philippines Europe Select the country where this machine is installed Select the setting when installing the machine Fax Factory Default Description Settings Y
37. Specify that the document and form are printed overlapping PCL and XPS printer driver only Display the form information PCL and XPS printer driver only Print the form on All Pages 1st Page Only Even Page and Odd Page Place the form in back of the document or in front on the printed docu ment PCL and XPS printer driver only Quality Tab The Quality Tab allows you to Switch between color and grayscale printing Control the darkness of an image Brightness Specify the printer color settings Perform color separation Select whether or not economy printing is used Set the edge strength to Low Middle or High Specify the amount of details in graphic patterns PCL and XPS printer driver only Specify the format of fonts that are to be downloaded PCL and Postscript printer driver only 5 10 Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver Print using the printer s fonts PCL and Postscript printer driver only Control the tones of an image Contrast PCL printer driver only Specify the image compression method PCL printer driver only Select whether or not Auto Trapping function is used Postscript printer driver only E Specify the Black Over Print function Postscript printer driver only Other Tab The Other Tab allows you to m Select that Microsoft Excel sheets are not to be divided when printing 32bit printer driver only m Select that the white background of Microsoft Pow
38. and then store it where it can immediately be referred to when necessary Trademarks KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or regis tered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS INC bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Windows Windows NT Windows Server is a registered trademark or trade mark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Insti tute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc in the United States and or other countries All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Copyright Notice Copyright 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Marunouchi Center Building 1 6 1 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0005 Japan All Rights Reserved This document may not be copied in whole or part nor transferred to any other media or language without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC x 1 Manual Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice Considerable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and o
39. 15 Error indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred Lights up in orange when the service represen tative is being called 16 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued 17 Utility Counter key Press to display the Utility Settings screen In the Utility Settings screen settings can be specified for the parameters in the Accessibil ity Meter Count Address Registration User Settings and Admin Settings screens About the Control Panel No Name Function 18 Mode Memory key Press to store the desired settings for copy fax or scan operations In addition stored settings can be recalled 19 Access key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied press the Access key after entering the user name and password for user authentication or the account name and password for account track in order to log on to this machine While logged on press the Access key to log off About the Control Panel 1 5 Touch panel Home screen Welcome Select function No Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operat ing status Fax Press to enter Fax mode Scan to E mail Press to enter Scan to E mail mode For details refer to the Printe
40. Double Sided copying For details on setting duplex Dou ble Sided copying refer to About Duplex Printing on page 4 30 For N up on duplexed pages choose Collate only in the printer driver s Basic Tab Do not set collation in the application 13 28 Solving Other Problems Symptom Cause Solution With N up on Both the printer driver For N up on multiple copies choose multiple cop and the application Collate only in the printer driver s Basic ies the out have been set for col Tab Do not set collation in the applica put is lation tion incorrect Booklet Left Both the printer driver For Booklet Left Binding and Booklet and Right and the application Right Binding choose Collate only in Binding out have been set for col the printer driver s Basic Tab Do not put is incor lation set collation in the application rect You hear The machine is not Place the machine on a flat hard level unusual level surface NOISES The tray is not Remove the tray that you are printing installed correctly from and reinsert it completely into the machine There is a foreign Turn off the machine and remove the object stuck inside object If you cannot remove it contact the machine Technical Support Some areas Acrobat 8 Macintosh With the Acrobat Scan setting turn off of the version is used for the OCR and Filtering functions scanned sca
41. Font List Prints the font list PS Prints the PostScript font list PCL Prints the PCL font list HDD Directory List Prints the directory list for the hard disk Counter List Print Prints the list of counters Fax Settings Specify the fax settings For details on specifying the fax settings refer to the Facsimile User s Guide Select Default Start App This screen appears when an available application is registered while Enhanced Server Authentication is enabled 3 20 User Settings Admin Settings From the Admin Settings screen various settings are available to be changed by the machine administrator In order to display the Admin Settings screen the user must log on using the administrator password Admin Settings _ Machine Sleep Time Settings Setting Date amp Time Date Settings XX XX XX Time Time Zone Daylight Enable Saving Time Offset List Counter Job Settings List Report Input Tray Auto Reset Enable Settings Auto Reset Priority Mode Administrator Administrator Name Registration Registration Extension No E mail Address Admin Settings 3 21 Machine Settings Device Name Address
42. Layout tab Specify settings for the page layout For details refer to Layout tab on page 5 12 Version Information tab View the driver version information Properties dialog box Settings concerning the installed options and the default settings for display ing confirmation messages and authentication dialog boxes can be changed To display the Properties dialog box right click the printer icon in the Print ers or Printers and Faxes window and then click Properties Item Description Configure tab Specify settings concerning the installed options For details refer to Configure tab on page 5 13 Settings tab Change the default settings for displaying confir mation messages and authentication dialog boxes For details refer to Settings tab on page 5 13 5 8 Fax driver settings Common Settings The buttons described below appear on all tabs Item Description OK Click this button to apply changes to the settings and close the dialog box Cancel Click this button to cancel changes to the settings and close the dialog box Help Click this button to display the Help for the items in the displayed dialog box Add Favorite Setting Click this button to save the current settings so they can be recalled later For details refer to Saving fax driver settings on page 5 14 Edit Fav
43. Press ON Press OK Press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key A single proof copy is printed NOOI 8 Check the proof copy If the proof copy was printed as desired continue with step 9 Bes Using the keypad the number of copies can be changed To print another proof copy press Proof Copy Bes To change the settings press Cancel and then perform steps 2 through 8 9 Press Print The remaining number of copies is printed Separate Scan The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for example when all pages of a document cannot be loaded into the ADF and then the scanned pages can be treated as a single copy job In addition the scanning location can be switched between the original glass and the ADF during the scanning operation Item Description ON Select this setting to perform a Separate Scan operation OFF Select this setting to not perform a Separate Scan operation Separate Scan 7 11 Scanning the document in separate batches Bey Do not load more pages into the ADF than the maximum number of pages allowed otherwise a document misfeed or damage to the docu ment may occur Bes When sorting or making double sided or combined copies using the original glass instead of using the Separate Scan operation the docu ment can be scanned as a multiple page document 1 In the home screen press Copy 2 Place the document on t
44. Print Settings Forward amp Print Forward amp Print If TX Fails Select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded Forward amp Print Normally prints the fax at the same time that is forwarded Forward amp Print If TX Fails Prints the fax if for warding failed Bes The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the PC Fax RX Settings Memory RX and Nighttime RX Settings screens Remote RX Settings Item Description Remote RX Enabled Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the remote reception function is used Remote RX No Type in the remote reception number 2 digits for performing remote reception PC Fax RX Settings Item Description PC Fax RX Setting Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the PC fax reception function is used PC Fax RX Print Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a PC fax is printed automati cally after it is received However if the fax is saved with the memory recep tion function it is not automatically printed Bey The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the Forward TX Settings Memory RX and Nighttime RX Settings screens Fax Settings Admin Settings Nightti
45. Settings Letter Legal Oficio A4 Select the size of paper used for printing received documents In order for this parameter to be available Tray Selection for RX Print must be set to Auto Be The default setting is Letter for 120V model and A4 for other models Fax Settings Admin Settings Item Description Tray Selection for Settings Auto Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 RX Print Tray 4 Select the paper drawer to be used when a specific paper drawer is used for printing received docu ments Bes Tray 3 and Tray 4 do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed Min Reduction for RX Print Settings 87 96 100 Specify the reduction ratio used for printing received documents Print Separate Fax Pages Settings ON OFF Select whether or not pages are split when the received document is longer than the standard paper size When Duplex Print RX is set to ON this parame ter does not appear Duplex Print RX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not received documents are printed on both sides of paper When Print Separate Fax Pages is set to ON this parameter does not appear Fax Function Settings Item Description F Code TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not F code transmissions are used
46. Volume Basic Sound Enable Volume Successful Operation Enable Completion Completion Volume Transmission Enable Completion Volume 3 2 Accessibility Touch Panel Adujstment Message Display Time LCD Brightness Completion Enable Preparation Volume Caution Low Caution Enable Sound Sound Level 1 Volume Low Caution Enable Sound Level 2 Volume Low Caution Enable Sound Level 3 Volume Severe Enable Caution Sound Volume Accessibility 3 3 d Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Accessibility Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Key Repeat Interval The length of time until the value begins to change after a button is held down and the length of time for the value to change can be specified Time to Start Settings 0 1 to 3 0 seconds Default 0 8 Specify the length of time until a value begins to change after a button is held down Key Interval Settings 0 1 to 3 0 seconds Default 0 3 Specify the length of time for the value to change Sound Settings Settings can be specified for the various sounds pro duced with key operations Set all Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High To spe
47. When Basic Mode is selected 0 0 ccceccecceccesceseeeesecsecseescesceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceseeseeaees 9 8 When Advanced Mode is selected ceceeccecesceseeecsecsecsecseesceneeneenseeseeseteceseteees 9 9 Using a Web Service scscscssccsscsessesressssrserssssesssssscsssssseseesessecsscssessessessesensenseesoese 9 12 Settings required to use a Web Service ccececseeeseesseesceeceeceeceeceaeeseeseeaeenecaeensente 9 12 Contents x 11 Installing this machine on the Computer ececeesesscseceeceeceseesecseceecseceeeseeaeeneees 9 12 Confirmation before installation ce eeeceeseeeeseeesceseseeseseesceeeseeecseeeeeeens 9 12 Installation procedure ccccesessessessessessecsceseescescesceeeseceeceecaeaceaceaecaeensensente 9 12 Specifying the scan command from a computer Web Service ccceeeseeeeeeee 9 13 Specifying the scan command from a computert 0 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 9 13 10 Scanning with the Machine ccsscssessssssssessesssssssssssessessessessessssssessssessessessensees 10 1 Initial settings se00 Useful functions aay Performing Scan to E mail mode Operations sscccssssrssccssscesseeeseesseresesseaeeees 10 3 Basic Scan to E mail operation ccccccecescescesececsecaececescencenseneecaeeseeseeaeeseeseerees 10 3 Specifying document settings cccecsesseseeseesceecescesceseeeececececeaeeaeeaeeaeeeeeensente 10 4 Simplex Duplek enrico ririri cuc
48. a USB memory device and an authentication device IC card type can be connected to the USB hub at the same time 4 Tray 1 Manual feed tray 5 Tray 2 6 Output tray 7 Scanner lock lever 8 Original glass 9 Original cover pad 10 Scanner unit 1 4 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 11 Fuser unit 12 Right door 13 Transfer roller 14 Transfer belt unit 15 Imaging unit s 16 Front cover 17 Waste toner bottle 18 Toner cartridge s Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 5 Rear View 1 Power switch 2 Rear cover 3 Power connection 4 LINE telephone line jack 5 TEL telephone jack 6 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet Inter face port 7 USB port Front View with Options 1 Lower feeder unit PF P08 Tray 3 2 Lower feeder unit PF P08 Tray 4 3 Working Table WT P01 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Adjusting the angle of the control panel The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation 1 Grab the sides of the control panel and then tilt it up Be Before moving the control panel to a lower angle tilt it up first and then slowly tilt it down Be When tilting the control panel do not press on the touch panel Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 7 Drivers CD DVD Printer Drivers PostScript D
49. and heat press transfer paper Cold water transfer paper Pressure sensitive Designed specifically for inkjet printers such as superfine paper glossy film and postcards Already been printed on by another printer copier or fax machine Dusty Wet or damp Print Media Bes Keep media between 15 and 85 relative humidity Toner does not adhere well to moist or wet media Layered Adhesive Folded creased curled embossed warped or wrinkled Perforated three hole punched or torn Too slick too coarse or too textured Different in texture roughness on the front and back Too thin or too thick Stuck together with static electricity Composed of foil or gilt too luminous Heat sensitive or cannot withstand the fusing temperature 180 C 356 F Irregularly shaped not rectangular or not cut at right angles Attached with glue tape paper clips staples ribbons hooks or buttons Acidic Any other media that is not approved Thick Stock Paper thicker than 90 g m 24 Ib bond is referred to as thick stock You can print continuously with thick stock However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Capacity Tray 1 2 Up to 20 sheets depending on their thick ness Tray 3 4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Thic
50. can be selected with the automatic tray switching feature Tray 4 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not Tray 4 can be selected with the automatic tray switching feature ACS Level Settings 0 to 4 Default 2 Adjust the level for detecting whether a docu ment is in color or in black and white when the Auto Color setting is selected Set to 0 or 1 for a tendency toward black and white or set to 3 or 4 for a tendency toward color Scan to E mail Settings Favorite Direct Input Log Default Tab Specify the initial screen when changing to the E mail transmission screen Fax Settings Favorite Direct Input Others Default Tab Specify the initial screen when changing to the fax transmission screen Scan to Folder Default Tab Settings Favorite Direct Input Log Specify the initial screen when changing to the folder transmission screen 3 14 User Settings Copy Settings Be All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Auto Zoom for Combine Settings Yes No Select whether or not the zoom ratio is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Paper set ting and a Combine setting are selected Default Copy Settings Settings Factory Default Current Set ting Select the default copy settings that are selected when the
51. key to scan in color or press the Start B amp W key to scan in black and white Specifying destinations 10 33 Registering destinations Destination registration By registering destinations where scan data is frequently sent recipients can be recalled allowing a data to easily be sent With this machine address book destinations group destinations and program destinations can be registered Address Book The information for destinations E mail addresses and computer folders etc where data is frequently sent can be registered A destination can selected from the address book when scanning A maximum of 2 000 address book destinations can be registered E mail address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection For details on registering refer to Registering an address book destination on page 10 35 Computer folder FTP SMB and WebDAV destinations are registered only from PageScope Web Connection For details refer to the Reference Guide Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group This is useful when sending the same scan data to multiple destinations A maximum of 100 group destinations with a maximum of 500 address book destinations per group can be registered Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection For details on registering refer to the Reference Guide Program Dest
52. 0x00 Over written with Oxff Overwritten with Oxaa Mode 8 Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwrit ten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Over written with Oxff Overwritten with Oxaa gt Verified 3 72 Admin Settings Execute Press to delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it and then press OK Bes Perform this operation when disposing of this machine Bes While the data is being deleted by being overwritten do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on Bez After the machine is restarted all data is deleted by being overwritten The following data is deleted Registered user and account data Registered information for secured print ing and saved files Image files SSD Low level Format Press to delete all data on the SSD by overwrit ing it and then press OK Bey Perform this operation when disposing of this machine Bes While the data is being deleted by being overwritten do not use the power switch to turn the machine off and on Bez After the machine is restarted all data is deleted by being overwritten The following data is deleted Sent and received fax data Address book E mail address and tele phone number destination data S MIME certificates Image files Admin Settings 3 73 Changing the administrator password T
53. 13 22 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Bes Frequent misfeeds in any area indicate that area should be checked repaired or cleaned Repeated misfeeds may also happen if you re using unsupported print media or original media ness type etc is being used Symptom Cause Solution Several The front edges of Remove the media and even up the sheets go the media are not front edges then reload it through the even machine The media is moist Remove the moist media and replace it together from humidity with new dry media Media mis Front cover needs to Open and close the front cover again feed mes be opened and sage stays closed again to reset on the machine Some media remains Check the media path again to make misfed in the sure that you have removed all of the machine misfed media Duplex mis Unsupported media Use KONICA MINOLTA approved feeds wrong size thick media See Special Paper on page 4 11 Also refer to http printer konicaminolta com for a complete list of currently approved media Plain paper recycled paper special paper Thick 1 and Thick 2 can be autoduplexed if the media type is set properly in the driver See Specifica tions on page 4 2 Make sure that you have not mixed media types in the tray Do not duplex envelopes labels letter head postcards glossy media or sin gle side only paper Media i
54. 2 Select this setting to produce one dou ble sided copy from two single sided documents 2 gt 1 Select this setting to produce two sin gle sided copies from one double sided docu ment 2 gt 2 Select this setting to produce dou ble sided copies from double sided documents Combine Select whether to make combined copies No Select this setting to not produce combined copies 2 in 1 Select this setting to copy two document pages onto one page 4 in 1 Horizontal Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page The document images will be arranged horizontally 4 in 1 Vertical Select this setting to copy four document pages onto one page The document images will be arranged vertically Duplex Combine 7 7 Item Description Binding Position Specify the binding positions for the document and the copies Orig Binding Posi tion Select Left Bind Right Bind Top Bind or Auto as the binding position for the document If the binding position for the document is set to Auto the binding position is set at the left or at the top Output Binding Position Select Left Bind Right Bind Top Bind or Auto as the binding position for the copies If the binding position for the copy is set to Auto the binding position is set at the left or at the top Original Direction Select Top Bottom Left or Righ
55. 3 130 0 x 185 0 1 2 No Yes Yes No Custom 3 6 8 5 x 92 0 216 0 x 1 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Minimum 5 8 14 0 148 0 356 0 Custom 7 2 8 5 x 182 0 216 0 1 2 Yes No No No Maximum 10 0 14 0 x 254 0 356 0 Notes Tray 1 Multipurpose Tray 3 4 Plain paper only Original glass only Numerical value input Only a size within the range 182 0 216 0 x 254 0 356 0 is allowed Print Media 4 3 Types Bes Keep media on a flat level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it Be Before printing a large number of copies on special paper other than plain paper perform a trial print to check the quality of the print result Plain Paper Recycled Paper Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets depending on the media weight Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets depending on the media weight Tray 3 4 Up to 500 sheets depending on the media weight Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 3 4 Face up Driver Plain Paper Recycled Media Type Weight 60 to 90 g m Duplexing Refer to Specifications on page 4 2 Use plain paper that is Suitable for plain paper printers and copiers such as standard or recycled office paper DO NOT use media that is Coated with a processed surface such as carbon paper and colored paper that has been treated Unapproved iron on transfer media such as heat pressure paper
56. 3 Using a coin remove a screw L Di a 4 Open the cover K 5 Remove the hook and then remove the backup battery Replacing Consumables 11 33 6 Remove the hook and then insert a new backup battery Bes When inserting the new backup battery be sure that the side faces tow erd the left Risk of explosion if bat tery is replaced by an ue incorrect type Dispose of Me soe ig used batteries according Ca to your local regulations Do not burn the backup battery Reinstall the panel and tighten a screw Install the cover Reconnect all interface cables O O N Reconnect the power cord and turn on the machine 1 1 Use Date XX XX XX on the Admin Settings Machine Settings Date amp Time Settings menu to set the date and use Time on the Admin Settings Machine Settings Date amp Time Settings menu to set the time 11 34 Replacing Consumables Replacing the Fuser Unit When the time to replace the fuser unit is reached the message Replace fusing unit appears Printing can continue even after this message appears however since the print quality is reduced the fuser unit should be replaced immediately 1 Turn off the machine Note There are extremely hot parts within the machine Before replacing the fuser unit wait about 20 minutes after turning off the machine and then check that th
57. 5 1 Selecting Driver Options Defaults FOr WiNdOWS scssccsccescecscesscccsccssccssescesesseccssessecsesesscesesesesescessessecssseseccsseeseseesees 5 2 Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 5 2 Uninstalling the Printer Driver FOL WANGOWS i iusscsscsnssssscessssncessonssessecectunsosssebesscdsosssesssodssasessoaceasscadsosesessesaoesbsonssosnosossens 5 4 Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 5 4 Displaying Printer Driver Settings FOF WINGOWS sccessiescsadscacessdcesteossessssvseouss snssads season essas ossessi aeonit iaso ssecedeoseosssseronns Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista Server 2008 00 eesssccsseeeeceeseeeecsesevsecsesessceevsesaeseeecaeeteecnesas 5 5 Windows XP Server 2003 eeen a ae TEE AOTEA EAEra RESIENTE 5 5 Windows 2000 ayani i E N E E EEE E ions Mateo ats 5 5 Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver esessesessseesesesessesesoeeesosecoesesossese 5 6 Common Buttons ishe a eee ees en aE EIEE aa a ai 5 6 LOM n r E A E EA A EAA 5 6 Cancel hane Seas E aA une Tee aa Taa aa Ea OEE 5 6 Apply in a E E A A a R A A E 5 6 Helppes e Ee e aE EE EEA EIKEN 5 6 Favorite Setting ocoreinissssnruasiiisiaisni nnt i s 5 6 printer Wale wy EEE E EAE ha E E AAE E erate 5 7 Paper View e e N E A N EA 5 7 Quality VIEW lareira etree E A R EE REA E tee 5 7 Printer Information scssi ennenen i enia 5 7 PDS PATA EEEE EAEE E E EA T 5 7 Advan
58. A 2S K CRY p A MIR CI AAY Gh 1 5 Close the right door 11 29 Replacing Consumables 1 6 Install the all toner cartridges all imaging units and waste toner bottle Bey For details on installing the toner cartridges imaging units or waste toner bottle refer to Replacing a Toner Car tridge on page 11 6 or Replacing a Imaging Unit on page 11 11 1 T Close the front cover Bex When closing the front cover press the area of the cover with small pro jections 11 30 Replacing Consumables 1 8 Reconnect the power cord and turn on the machine 1 9 Reset the counter in the Admin Settings Maintenance Menu Supplies Consumables Replace Transfer Belt Unit menu Replacing Consumables 11 31 Replacing the Backup Battery When the backup battery is at its end of life the machine s date and time can not be retained Follow the procedure described below to replace the backup battery Note Only use the coin shaped 3V lithium battery CR2032 It s very important to protect the machine controller board and any associated circuit boards from electrostatic damage Before performing this procedure review the antistatic caution on page 11 40 In addition always handle circuit boards by the edges only 1 Turn off the machine and discon nect the power cord and inter face cables 2 Remove the cover 11 32 Replacing Consumables
59. FAX TX failed due to error Redial will be attempted after predetermined time progress The job did not end normally because an error occurred during I FAX TX A document is sent again after the specified time period has lapsed 13 46 Status error and service messages Service messages These messages indicate a more serious problem that can only be corrected by a service representative If one of these messages appears turn the machine off then on again If the problem persists contact your local vendor or authorized service provider Message Cause Solution Service Call An error has been Restart the machine detected with the item This often clears the indicated by xxxx in service message and the service message machine operation can resume Error occurred Power OFF and ON or contact Service with Trouble Code xxxx If the problem persists contact the service rep resentative Status error and service messages 13 47 13 48 Status error and service messages Installing Accessories Introduction Note Use of accessories not manufactured or supported by KONICA MINOLTA will void your warranty inolta com es For details of accessories visit our web site http printer konicam Lower Feeder Unit Tray 3 Tray 4 500 sheet tray included Working Table WT P01 Provides an area to temporarily place an origina
60. Insufficient HDD capacity Delete unnecessary file The job is cancelled There is not enough space available on the hard disk Delete any unneces sary files Cancel the job Document Registration Limit Over Saved documents in folder reached limit The job is cancelled The number of image files on the hard disk has reached the maximum possible Cancel the job Connection Failed Check if the destination is correct The job is cancelled The machine failed to connect to the FTP server Wait a while The error is canceled Error Occurred during Writing Check whether it is write protected or out of space The machine failed to write data to the USB memory device Cancel the job Scan TX Failed Scan TX failed Job is cancelled The scan transmission failed Does not appear with a broadcast transmission Wait a while The error is canceled Counter reached its limit The counter has reached its maximum allowance Please delete the job The counter has reached the upper limit Delete the job Status error and service messages 13 45 Message Cause Solution I Fax RX failed Failed to complete the job due to an error while I FAX RX Check the log The job did not end normally because an error occurred during I FAX RX Check the log I Fax TX failed I
61. Internet fax functions are specified from PageScope Web Connection For details on the settings refer to the Reference Guide TCP IP Settings Specify the necessary settings in order to use this machine in a TCP IP net work environment Network Fax Functions Settings Enable Internet fax functions E mail TX SMTP Enable the e mail Internet fax transmission function In addition specify the IP address of the SMTP server and the e mail address of this machine Be When sending Internet faxes Binary Division is always set to OFF E mail RX POP Enable the e mail Internet fax reception function In addition specify the address login name and password for the POP server Subject Register a subject for the e mail Internet fax The subject can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent For details refer to Specifying e mail Internet fax settings on page 3 17 Text Register the message text for the e mail Internet fax The message text can also be specified from the control panel before an Internet fax is sent For details refer to Specifying e mail Internet fax set tings on page 3 17 1 14 Initial settings Useful functions By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent E Address Book Register information of destinations fax numbers and e mail addresses
62. Original Settings Original Direction Specify the orientation of the document Item Description Top Select this setting when the document is loaded g with its top edge at the top Bottom Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom Left Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left at the right when placed on the original glass Right Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right at the left when placed on the original glass Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 21 Original Settings Orig Binding Position Specify the binding position when scanning a double sided document using the ADF The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double sided document will be bound at the top or at the left Item Description Left Bind Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left Top Bind Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top Auto Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position If the document length is 297 mm 11 69 inches or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected If the document length is more than 297 mm 11 69 inches a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected Color Mode Select whether the docu
63. Reference Guide on the Documentation CD DVD Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 13 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Control panel and touch panel screens About the Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Powerliave Fix Exjiail _ Folder Cdpy Refet o C h Access ABC DEF a sh Soe mus Mode Memory _4 5 6 Stop E PORS W WZ 9 Utility Counter sre o j Start Em C e F Data Error CRESI 191817 16 15 14 13 121110 No Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages Specify the various settings by directly touching the panel 2 Power Save Press to enter Power Save mode While the key indicator machine is in Power Save mode the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off To cancel Power Save mode press the Power Save key again 3 Fax key indica Press to enter Fax mode While the machine is in tor Fax mode the indicator on the Fax key lights up in green 4 E mail key indi Press to enter Scan to E mail mode While the cator machine is in Scan to E mail mode the indicator on the E mail key lights up in green 5 Folder key indi Press to enter Scan to Folder mode While
64. Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of Thick 2 paper for sim plex single sided printing Envelope Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of envelopes for simplex single sided printing Side Edge Adjustment Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray Tray1 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for simplex single sided printing 3 64 Admin Settings Tray2 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for simplex single sided printing Tray3 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for simplex single sided printing Tray4 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for simplex single sided printing Left ADJ Duplex Adjust the left margin for media fed from each paper tray with duplex double sided printing Tray1 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 1 for duplex double sided printing Tray2 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 2 for duplex double sided printing Tray3 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 3 for duplex double sided printing Tray4 Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the left margin of media fed from Tray 4 for duplex doub
65. Settings Admin Settings Memory RX Item Description Memory RX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the memory reception function is used If ON is selected received documents are saved in the machine s memory and are not automatically printed Password Specify the password up to 8 digits for allowing doc uments saved in the memory to be used Bes The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the PC Fax RX Settings Forward TX Settings and Nighttime RX Settings screens Closed Network RX Password Item Description Enable Settings Yes No Select whether or not the closed network reception function is used Password Specify the password 4 digits for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions Forward TX Settings Item Description Forward TX Setting Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the memory reception function is used Forwarding Address Type in the fax number of the forwarding destination Press to select a registered destination Ees A received document can also be forwarded to an e mail address To forward documents to an e mail address select the forwarding destination from the address book Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 15 Item Description Forward amp
66. To send a fax to multiple recipients continue adding them in the same way Up to 100 recipients can be registered To delete a recipient added under Recipient List select the name of the recipient to be deleted and then click Delete If recipients have been registered as a group select the name of the group and then click Add Recipients All members of the group are added under Recipient List broadcast transmission A Click OK The FAX Transmission Popup dialog box appears again with the speci fied names added under Recipient List Sending a PC fax 5 3 Selecting a recipient from the address book By clicking Add from Address Book in the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the address book des tinations registered on this machine Bez In order to select recipients from the address book of this machine your computer must be connected to this machine and be able to com municate with it Be Before a recipient can be selected from the address book of this machine the name and fax number of the recipient must be added to the address book For details refer to Registering destinations on page 6 1 When sending a fax click Add from Address Book in the FAX Transmis sion Popup dialog box 2 Select Address Book List from the list on the left side of the dialog box to display the desired recipient under Address Book To start comm
67. User authentication settings and then click Add 5 Select the desired template and then click OK The User settings window appears 6 Enter the user name and password and select the IC card authentica tion tab Enter the E mail address and other information as required T Place the IC card on the authentication device and click Start reading To skip the card registration with Data Administrator but to associate the card with user using the authentication device connected to this machine select Input the card ID directly and enter the card ID num ber corresponding to the registered user 8 Click OK Repeat steps 4 to 7 to register all users 9 Click Export to the device Select the user name and click Edit to change the registered data 10 click write Data Administrator provides the batch copy function that batch config ures the registered user data in multiple machines with the authentica tion device enabled The registered user data is configured in this machine 11 click oK Registering a user 15 5 1 2 If the authentication device is already connected to the computer remove it turn the main power of this machine off and then connect the authenti cation device to this machine Ees To turn the power switch of this machine off and on first turn the main power switch off and then turn it on after 10 or more seconds has elapsed Not doing so may result in an operat
68. When Advanced Mode is selected The following parameters can be set when Advances Mode is selected m Load Specify a saved settings file dat file for scanning E Save Save the current settings as a settings file dat file Default Return all settings to their defaults Help icon Click to display the Help m About icon Click to display the software version information m Paper source Specify the paper source With scanning documents from the ADF select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document Em Original Size Specify the original size m Scan Type Specify the scan type Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9 9 m Resolution Specify the resolution m Scale Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area Bes If the resolution is set at 1200 x 1200dpi or higher a setting larger than 100 cannot be specified E Scanning Mode Select Auto or Manual When Manual is selected a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified for example for Brightness Contrast Fil ter Curves Levels Color Balance and Hue Saturation Bes The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected Bes The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for Scan Type Bes If Auto is selected as the scanning mode scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan
69. and parameters must be specified on the TCP IP and FTP screens In order to perform an SMB transmission a connection to the network is required and parameters must be specified on the TCP IP and SMB screens In order to perform a WebDAV transmission a connection to the network is required and parameters must be specified on the TCP IP and Web DAV screens In order to perform a Web Service transmission a connection to the net work is required and parameters must be specified on the TCP IP and WSD Print screens In order to perform an E mail transmission a connection to the network is required parameters must be specified on the TCP IP and SMTP screens and an E mail address must be registered for Administrator Registration For details on specifying network settings refer to the Reference Guide Useful functions The destinations recipients for scan data can be registered as address book destinations or group destinations The destination and scan settings can be registered together as a single program This is convenient for frequently scanning documents and send ing data under the same conditions 10 2 Initial settings Performing Scan to E mail mode operations Basic Scan to E mail operation The basic procedure for the Scan to E mail operation which sends scan data with an E mail transmission is described below 1 Press Scan to E mail to display the initial Scan to E mail mode scr
70. and user authentication account track settings Select the status of each item in the Set ting box Acquire Device Informa tion Click this button to communicate with this machine and read the status of the installed options Acquire Settings Click this button to specify the conditions such as the destination that are acquired from the device information Click Acquire Device Information to communicate with this machine and read the machine status This feature is not available if the com puter cannot establish a connection and communicate with this machine Settings tab The settings available on the Settings tab are described below Item Description Display Constraint Mes sage Select this check box to display a message when functions that cannot be used together have been enabled from the driver Verify Authentication settings before printing Select this check box to verify authentication set tings for this machine before printing and display a message if they do not match Popup Authentication Dialog when printing Select this check box to display the User Authenti cation Account Track dialog box when printing so that the user name and account name can be entered Reconfirm FAX number entered directly Select this check box to display a dialog box for entering the fax number again for confirmation when Add Recipients is clicke
71. any applicable laws and regulations regarding export control of any countries x 4 Legal Restrictions on Copying Certain types of documents must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of such documents off as the originals The following is not a complete list but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copying Financial Instruments Personal checks Traveler s checks Money orders Certificates of deposit Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness Stock certificates Legal Documents Food stamps Postage stamps canceled or uncanceled Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies Internal revenue stamps canceled or uncanceled Passports Immigration papers Motor vehicle licenses and titles House and property titles and deeds General Identification cards badges or insignias Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner In addition it is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or foreign cur rencies or works of art without permission of the copyright owner When in doubt about the nature of a document consult with legal counsel Bes This machine provides the forgery prevention function in order to prevent financial instruments from being copied illegally We appreciate your understanding that printed images may infrequently have some noise or image data may not be stored under certain circumstances due to this forgery prevent
72. any of the following methods to specify destinations E Selecting from the registered destinations on page 3 7 E Directly typing in the address on page 3 8 E Selecting from the log on page 3 9 E Selecting with an LDAP search on page 3 10 Selecting from the registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine Ees In order to select a registered destination address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering destinations on page 6 1 Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered they can be specified as Favorites As a default the Favorites destination list appears when the initial Fax screen is displayed Select a destination from the list To specify multiple destinations for a broad cast transmission select all destinations where the fax is to be sent Bey The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered For details refer to Registering destinations on page 6 17 Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered 1 In the initial Fax screen press LA 2 Press the desired index tab to search the destinations Ifthe desired index tab is not displayed press
73. available 3 12 Specifying scan settings Specifying communication settings G3 fax With Line Settings in the Comm Settings screen settings for the transmis sion line can be specified ECM OFF The error correction mode ECM is turned off when data is being sent ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU T International Telecommu nication Union Telecommunication Standardization Sector Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirm ing that the sent data is free of errors Therefore communication can be free of disturbances caused by telephone line noise etc If noise frequently occurs it may take a slightly longer time to complete a communication com pared with when ECM is turned off After the transmission has been com pleted this machine automatically turns on ECM Bey This setting cannot be used together with polling reception es If V34 OFF is set to No ECM OFF cannot be set to Yes V34 OFF V 34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line In this case it is recommended that V 34 be turned off before sending data After the transmission has been com pleted this machine automatically turns on the V 34 mode Bes This setting ca
74. be set so that this report is not printed Broadcast Result Report This report provides a record of the results of broadcast transmissions If necessary the conditions for printing can be specified Broadcast Reservation Report G3 fax only This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions This report is automatically printed when a broad cast timer transmission is queued If necessary the machine can be set so that this report is not printed PC Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred prevent ing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly 7 4 Printing reports lists Report name Description l Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed Types of lists The following types of fax related lists can be printed by this machine List name Description Address Book List This list contains the information registered for address book destinations Group List This list contains the information registered for group destinations Program List This list contains the information registered for program destinations Fax Setup Information List This list contains the fax related settings that have been specified Printing reports lists 7 5 Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions Re
75. can be sent from a computer Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 on the network or this machine can scan using a specified operation and the scan data can be sent to a computer The settings that must be spec ified in advance on the computer are described below Settings required to use a Web Service The following settings are required in order to use a Web Service m Install this machine on the computer m Specify settings on the machine for using a Web Service Bes Specify the Web Service settings on the machine from the Admin Set tings screen For details refer to the Reference Guide Installing this machine on the computer Confirmation before installation Before installation make sure that Network Discovery Network and Shar ing Center in Control Panel is enabled Installation procedure 1 In the Start button menu click Network The devices connected to the network appear 2 Right click the scanner icon for this machine and then click Install Depending on the settings specified on the computer a UAC User Account Control message may appear Check the information described in the message and then continue with the procedure If both scanning and printing using a Web Service have been enabled on this machine this machine appears as a printer icon The driver software is automatically installed After a confirmation message appears click Close 3 From the control panel of the ma
76. can be viewed in the Broad cast Result Report For details refer to Broadcast Result Report on page 7 9 When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations the document cannot be sent with the Super Fine Resolution setting 400 x 400 dpi When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations the timer transmission function cannot be used Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server 3 20 Sending to multiple destinations broadcast transmissions Selecting a program destination A fax can be sent with a program destination registered on the machine Program destinations are registered with destinations where faxes are fre quently sent together with fax settings Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens allowing a fax to easily be sent without the trouble of specifying the various settings Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen For details on the initial Fax screen refer to Initial Fax screen on page 1 8 2 Position the document to be faxed For details on loading the original document refer to Positioning the original document on page 3 4 3 Press the Mode Memory key 4 Select the desired program destination from the list and then press OK The settings and destination addresses are recalled 5 Press the S
77. cc ececcesessesseeecesceeeseeseesecsecsecaecaecasesseaeeaeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeaees 10 32 Selecting a program destination 10 32 Registering destinations 10 34 Destination registration 10 34 Address Book 10 34 GTOUP 0 eeeeeeee 10 34 PLOT AM cies suc so8 acdeasadeviela costes ede Wek daly saseedndewa a one aae tea olivess 10 34 Registering an address book destination ccccceccesesseeseeseescesceseeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaes 10 35 Registering an address book destination E mail transmission 0 10 35 Registering Address Book SMB transmission c cesceseeseesseeeeeeceeceeceeceseeaes 10 36 Registering a program estimation ceeecessesceeceseeeeeeeeceecsesecesesceecneeecseeatees 10 36 11 Replacing Consumables ssccsscsscssesscssssessssesssssessesssseessessessesssssssssssessecsecseesees Replacing Consumables About Toner Cartridges Replacing a Toner Cartridge cccceeceecescesceeceseeseeseesecsecasensescesaecaecsecsecaeeseeeeeeeees 11 6 Replacing a Imaging UMit cece ce cececesseeseeseeseeseeseesceseeseeseeseeseeeceseeaeeaeeaeeneenes 11 11 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle ceceeseseeeceseeeseneeeceeceeeecseescecneeecneeatees 11 19 Replacing the Transfer Roller ccccccceseeseeseeseeseeseesceseeseeeeececeeceaeeaeeaeeneeneenee 11 22 Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit 11 24 Replacing the Backup Battery 11 32 Replacing the Fuser Units sesisusnirn
78. combination of Letter and Legal size pages select Legal as the size of the document to be scanned For details on specifying the size of an original document refer to Original Size on page 3 18 Do not load original documents that are bound together for example with paper clips or staples Positioning the original document Ees Do not load more than 50 sheets otherwise an original document mis feed or damage to the document or machine may occur Bes If the original document is not loaded correctly it may not be fed in straight or an original document misfeed or damage to the document may Occur Bey Do not open the ADF cover while documents loaded into the ADF are being scanned Using the original glass If the original glass is used documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF thick documents such as a book or a document on thin paper can be scanned and faxed With the original glass only one document page at a time can be scanned 1 Lift open the ADF 2 Place the document face down on the original glass aligning the document with the document scales Positioning the original document 3 5 3 Carefully close the ADF Be When using the original glass to scan a document containing multiple pages the document can be divided and scanned separately For details refer to Separate Scan on page 3 11 Positioning the original document Specifying destinations Use
79. countries TOYO is a registered trademark of TOYO INK MFG CO LTD in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries KONICA MINOLTA and the KONICA MINOLTA logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS INC bizhub and PageScope are trademarks or registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners x 1 Copyright Notice Copyright 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Marunou chi Center Building 1 6 1 Marunouchi Chiyoda ku Tokyo 100 0005 Japan All Rights Reserved This document may not be copied in whole or part nor transferred to any other media or language without written permission of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC Notice KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC reserves the right to make changes to this guide and to the equipment described herein without notice Consid erable effort has been made to ensure that this guide is free of inaccuracies and omissions However KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC makes no warranty of any kind including but not limited to any implied warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES I
80. density levels are available for the background color Density Select the density at which the document is to be scanned Nine density levels are available Select the appropriate density setting according to your document Sharpness Select the strength of outlines for example on characters and lines for scanning the docu ment To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness select a setting in the direction Seven sharpness levels are available Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 23 Resolution Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned Item Description 150x150dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 150 x 150 dpi 200x200dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 200 x 200 dpi 300x300dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 300 x 300 dpi 600x600dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 600 x 600 dpi Bez A finer scan has more information to be sent therefore the transmis sion time increases Be If File Type is set to Compact PDF Resolution can only be set to 300x300dpil File Settings File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved Item Description PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format Compact PDF Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format TIFF Select this
81. find your machine type and the toner cartridge part numbers on the consum ables reorder label inside the front cover your machine Machine Machine Parts Toner Cartridge Type Toner Cartridge Type Number Parts Number High Capacity Toner Cartridge Black K AOX5 132 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Yellow Y A0X5 232 AM A121 011 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Magenta M A0X5 332 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Cyan C A0X5 432 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Black K AOX5 152 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Yellow Y AOX5 252 EU A121 021 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Magenta M A0X5 352 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Cyan C A0X5 452 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Black K AOX5 192 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Yellow Y A0X5 292 AP A121 041 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Magenta M A0X5 392 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Cyan C A0X5 492 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Black K AOX5 182 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Yellow Y AOX5 282 GC A121 081 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Magenta M A0X5 382 High Capacity Toner Cartridge Cyan C A0X5 482 Bes For optimum print quality and performance use only the corre sponded TYPE genuine KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges Keep toner cartridges E In their packaging until you re ready to install them E ina cool dry location away from sunlight due to heat The maximum storage temperature is 35 C 95
82. format which were saved on the hard disk ted using Download Manager or Page Scope Web Connection A network Duplicate detection of Set Ethernet TCP IP IPv6 Enable connection the IPv6 address in Admin Settings menu to No cannot be failed established with an IPv4 address 13 30 Solving Other Problems Solving Problems with Printing Quality printed page imaging units may be defective Symptom Cause Solution Nothing is One or more of the Remove the toner cartridges and printed or toner cartridges may check if any is damaged there are be defective eri spots One or more of the Remove the imaging units and check on the for damage If it is damaged replace it The media is moist from humidity Adjust the humidity for media storage Remove the moist media and replace it with new dry media The media set in the printer driver mis matches the media loaded in the machine Load the correct media in the machine Several sheets are being fed at the same time Remove the media from the tray and check for static electricity Fan plain paper or other media and replace it in the tray Entire sheet is printed in black or color One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it One or more of the imaging units may be defective
83. forwarding received documents to the previously specified destination In order to use e mail forwarding the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting to ON E With Forward TX Settings Forwarding Address press and then specify the e mail address of the forwarding destination Useful reception functions With Forward TX Settings Forward amp Print select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded Bey For details on the settings refer to Forward TX Settings on page 2 15 Bey This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception memory reception or night reception Remote reception G3 fax Remote reception is the function for giving this machine the command to receive a fax by entering a remote reception number from an external tele phone In order to use remote reception the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Comm Settings RX Mode to Manual RX E Set Remote RX Settings Remote RX Enabled to Yes E With Remote RX Settings Remote RX No specify the remote recep tion number for giving the command to receive a fax Bey For details on the parameters in the Comm Settings screen refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 Bes For details on the parameters in the Remote RX Sett
84. frequently used func tions 1 12 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine System Requirements m Personal computer Pentium 3 400MHz or higher Windows Vista 1GHz or higher PowerPC G3 or later G4 or later is recommended Macintosh equipped with an Intel processor E Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Enter prise Ultimate Windows 7 Home Premium Professional Enterprise Ultimate Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Standard Enterprise Windows Server 2008 Standard Enterprise x64 Edition Windows Vista Home Basic Home Premium Ultimate Business Enterprise Windows Vista Home Basic Home Pre mium Ultimate Business Enterprise x64 Edition Windows XP Home Edition Professional Service Pack 2 or later Windows XP Profes sional x64 Edition Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or later Mac OS X and X Server 10 2 8 10 3 9 10 4 10 5 10 6 We recom mend installing the most recent patch Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 E Free hard disk space 256 MB or more E RAM 512 MB or more m CD DVD drive m 1 O interface 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet interface port USB 2 0 High Speed compliant port Ees The Ethernet cable and USB cable are not included with the machine Bez For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers refer to the
85. indi cated paper tray Otherwise cancel the job Paper Setting for Manual feed Load xx xxxx in bypass tray Touch Print Tray 1 has been selected for printing Press Print Other wise cancel the job Replenish paper Replenish paper or select other paper tray No other paper tray contains paper matching the specified type and size when Auto Tray Switching is set to ON Load the specified paper into a paper tray Replenish paper Load paper in bypass tray or select other paper tray There is no paper in Tray 1 when printing with Tray 1 selected when Auto Tray Switching is set to OFF Load paper into Tray 1 13 42 Status error and service messages Message Cause Solution Replenish paper Replenish paper in Tray x or select other paper tray There is no paper in the paper tray selected for printing when Auto Tray Switching is set to OFF Load paper into the specified paper tray Paper Size Type Mismatch Load the following paper in tray x Paper xxxxx XXXxx The type and size of the paper loaded into all of the paper trays are different when Auto Tray Switching is set to ON Load the specified paper into a paper tray Output Tray Full Output tray full Remove paper from the tray The output tray is full of paper Remove the paper from the output tray
86. media 13 7 Clearing Media Misfeeds The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns If you get burned immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical attention Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller 13 8 Clearing Media Misfeeds 3 Close the right side door Q gt z g c x ke E a gt oO gt a lt g amp 3 D E 5 Fan the media you removed and then align it well 13 9 Clearing Media Misfeeds 6 Load the media face up in Tray 2 Be Make sure that the media is flat Bes Do not load paper above the t mark Bey Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper T Close Tray 2 13 10 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3 4 1 Open the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 Bes Before opening the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 fold up Tray 1 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media 3 Close the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 Clearing Media Misfeeds 13 11 4 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4 and then remove all paper from the tray 5 Fan the pa
87. of the developer unit periodically switches to full speed for a fixed length of time Since printing continues during full speed drive the print quality is slightly affected how ever the standby time is short Engine DipSW Change the DIP switches to control machine operation Engine DipSW 1 Engine DipSW 28 Settings ON OFF Use to change engine settings Bes Normally there is no need to change the settings If it becomes necessary to change the settings do so according to the instructions from the service representative Main Scan Adjust Adjust the scanning settings Main Scan Page Settings Print Cancel Print the test pattern for fine adjustment of the color ratios in the main scanning direction 3 68 Admin Settings Scan Adjust Value Specify color adjustments for yellow magenta and cyan Yellow Settings 42 to 42 Default 0 Finely adjust the ratio of yellow in the main scanning direction Magenta Settings 42 to 42 Default 0 Finely adjust the ratio of magenta in the main scanning direction Cyan Settings 42 to 42 Default 0 Finely adjust the ratio of cyan in the main scan ning direction Supplies Consumables Replace Reset the service life counters for various con sumables Transfer Belt Unit Settings Yes
88. or mot tled image appears The media is moist from humidity Adjust the humidity in the media stor age area Remove the moist media and replace it with new dry media Unsupported media wrong size thick ness type etc is being used Use KONICA MINOLTA approved media See Specifications on page 4 2 One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it One or more of the imaging units is defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it There is insufficient fusing or the image comes off when rubbed Pripter The media is moist from humidity Remove the moist media and replace it with new dry media Unsupported media wrong size thick ness type etc is being used Use KONICA MINOLTA approved media See Specifications on page 4 2 Media type is set incorrectly When printing envelopes labels letter head postcards thick stock single side only paper or special paper spec ify the appropriate media type in the printer driver 13 34 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution defective There are One or more of the Remove the toner cartridges and toner toner cartridges are check for damage If it is damaged smudges or defective or install
89. page 3 70 With PC SMB In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input Press PC SMB Specify settings for Host Name File Path User Name and Password for the destination computer If necessary press Browse and then browse to a shared folder to spec ify it Press OK a A ON Bey To specify multiple destinations specify the various settings press Next Dest and then specify the settings for the next SMB destina tion Specifying destinations 10 29 Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 With WebDAV 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input Press WebDAV 3 Specify settings for Host Name File Path User Name and Password for the destination computer If necessary specify settings for other parameters in the Details screen Port No Type in the port number Range 1 to 65535 Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used SSL Setting Select whether or not SSL is used 5 Press OK Bey To specify multiple destinations specify the various settings press Next Dest and then specify the settings for the next WebDAV desti nation Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Detai
90. parameters available from the Settings screen refer to Specifying communication settings on page 10 12 5 Press the Start key Press the Start Color key to scan in color or press the Start B amp W key to scan in black and white Performing Scan to E mail mode operations 10 3 Bes This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original docu ment that will be scanned Before scanning the document specify its size If the size of the original document is not correctly specified some parts of the image may be lost For details on specifying the size of an original document refer to Original Size on page 10 5 Ng If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned scanning cannot continue To send the document pages that have already been scanned press the Start key To stop the transmission press the Stop key Specifying document settings The Simplex Duplex Original Size Original Settings Color Mode and Original Type parameters available from the Settings screen can be used to specify document settings Simplex Duplex Select whether double sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used Item Description 1 sided Select this setting when scanning a single sided document 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document Cover 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document with a c
91. replace it One or more of the imaging units may be defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it 13 32 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Printer Printer Printer Printer Symptom Cause Solution Image is One or more of the Remove the toner cartridges and blurred toner cartridges may check for damage If it is damaged background be defective replace it is lightly One or more of the Remove the imaging units and check stained imaging units may be for damage If it is damaged replace it there is defective insufficient gloss of the The original glass is _ Clean the original glass For details printed dirty refer to Cleaning the machine on image page 12 4 The original cover pad is dirty Clean the original cover pad For details refer to Cleaning the machine on page 12 4 The print or color density is uneven One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective or low Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it One or more of the imaging units is defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it The machine is not level Place the machine on a flat hard level surface Solving Problems with Printing Quality 13 33 Symptom Cause Solution Irregular print
92. setting to save data in the TIFF for mat JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format XPS Select this setting to save data in the XPS for mat Bes The File Type parameter may not be available depending on the set tings selected for Color Mode and Resolution Be If File Type is set to Compact PDF Resolution can only be set to 300x300apil 10 24 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations File Settings Scan Setting Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi page data is created when multiple pages are scanned Item Description Single Page Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages Multi Page Select this setting to save the scan as multi page data File Settings PDF Encrypt Specify the encryption settings when PDF or Compact PDF is selected Item Description Encryp Yes Select this setting to enable encryption After tion Level selecting this setting set the encryption level to Low Middle or High No Select this setting to disable encryption Password Type in the password required to open encrypted data up to 32 characters Document Permissions Type in the password required to change the per missions for a document up to 32 characters Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 25 Details If encry
93. settings Security Settings Security Details Password Rules Set to ON Security tab in PageScope Web Connection Authentication Setting General Settings Public Access Set to Restrict Security tab in PageScope Web Connection PKI Settings SSL TLS Settings SSL TLS Set to Enable Security tab in PageScope Web Connection PKI Settings SSL TLS Settings Encryption Strength Set to AES 256 or AES 256 3DES 168 Network tab in PageScope Web Connection E mail Settings S MIME E mail Text Encryption Method Set to 3DES AES 128 AES 192 or AES 256 Network tab in PageScope Web Connection FTP Settings FTP Server Settings FTP Server Set to Disable Network tab in PageScope Web Connection SNMP Settings SNMP v1 v2c Settings Write Set to Disable Network tab in PageScope Web Connection SNMP Settings SNMP v3 Settings Write User Name Security Level auth pass word and priv password Set to Auth password Priv pass word Security Settings Security Details Registering and Changing Addr Set to Restrict 1 Set to AES 3DES when Enhanced Security Mode is set to OFF Admin Settings Restore Defaults Item Description Restore Network Resets the network settings to their defaults After this
94. settings on page 3 11 For details on the Comm Settings screen refer to Specifying com munication settings G3 fax on page 3 13 Useful transmission func tions G3 fax on page 3 14 and Specifying e mail Internet fax settings on page 3 17 General operation For details on the Original Settings screen refer to Specifying docu ment settings on page 3 18 5 Press the Start key The fax is sent in black and white regardless of whether the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key is pressed After all document pages have been scanned the fax is sent Bey This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original docu ment that will be scanned Before scanning the document specify its size If the size of the original document is not correctly specified some parts of the image may be lost For details on specifying the size of an original document refer to Original Size on page 3 18 If the G3 fax cannot be sent for example because the recipient s line is busy the machine will redial the fax number and try again to send the fax For details on redialing refer to If the fax cannot be sent automatic redialing G3 fax on page 3 23 If the fax could not be sent a transmission results report is printed if the machine has been set to print the transmission results report For details on the transmission results report refer to Printing
95. than 297 mm 11 69 inches a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected 10 6 Performing Scan to E mail mode operations Color Mode Select whether the document will be scanned in color or black and white Item Description Color ON Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the corresponding setting OFF Select this setting to scan in full color Monochrome Gray Scale Select this setting for documents with many halftones such as in black and white photos Black Select this setting for documents with dis tinct black and white areas such as in line drawings Original Type Bes Black may not be available depending on the setting selected for File Type Select the appropriate image quality setting according to content of the docu ment Item Description Text Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text Text Photo Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos Photo Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos Performing Scan to E mail mode operations 10 7 Specifying scan settings The Background Density Resolution and File Settings parameters avail able from the Settings screen can be used to specify scan settings Background Densi
96. the cator machine is in Scan to Folder mode the indicator on the Folder key lights up in green 6 Copy key indi Press to enter Copy mode While the machine is in cator Copy mode the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green 7 Reset key Press to clear the settings except programmed set tings of all displayed functions Press to delete a job stopped during the scan opera tion About the Control Panel No Name Function 8 Interrupt key Press to enter Interrupt mode While the machine is indicator in Interrupt mode the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green To cancel Interrupt mode press the Interrupt key again 9 Stop key Pressing the Stop key while copying scanning or printing temporarily stops the operation 10 Start Color Press to start color copying scanning or faxing key Press to continue interrupted printing 11 Start indicator Lights up in blue when copying scanning or faxing can be performed Lights up in orange when copying scanning or fax ing cannot be performed 12 Start B amp W Press to start black and white copying scanning or key faxing Press to continue interrupted printing 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies a fax number an E mail address or a name Use to type in the various settings 14 C clear key Press to erase numbers or text Press to delete a job st
97. the memory can be printed or retrieved In order to use PC fax reception the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set PC Fax RX Settings PC Fax RX Setting to ON E With PC Fax RX Settings PC Fax RX Print select whether or not a PC fax is printed automatically after it is received For details refer to PC Fax RX Settings on page 2 16 This function cannot be used together with fax forwarding E mail for warding memory reception or night reception If faxes are saved with the memory reception function a PC fax is not automatically printed after it is received Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below 1 Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen 2 Press Others 3 Press Memory RX 4 Type in the password and then press OK The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed 5 Select the document to be printed and then press Print To delete the selected document press Delete The document is printed Bey With Memory RX specify the password that allows documents saved in the memory to be used For details refer to Memory RX on page 2 15 es Received PC fax documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Connection For details refer to the Reference Guide 5 18 Receiving a PC fax Uninstalling the fax driver
98. the new pass word Security Details Specify detailed security settings to limit machine functions Security can be enhanced if machine functions are limited Password Rules Settings ON OFF Select whether or not password rules are applied Registering and Changing Addr Settings Allow Restrict Select whether or not to prohibit editing of the address book If Restrict is selected the address book cannot be edited Manual Destination Input Settings Allow Restrict Select whether or not to prohibit manual input of a destination If Restrict is selected desti nations for fax and scan operations cannot be entered directly Hide Personal Data Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to display transmission destinations in the job log If ON is selected transmission destinations are not displayed 3 70 Admin Settings Disable Job History Display Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to display the communi cation log If ON is selected the communica tion log is not displayed Restrict Scan to USB Settings Allow Restrict Select whether or not to prohibit the Scan to USB function If Restrict is selected the Scan to USB function cannot be used Enhanced Security Mode Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to apply enhanced sec
99. the page count for fax operations Meter Count 3 7 Address Registration From the Address Registration screen E mail and fax destinations can be registered and viewed Address E mail Mode Check Registration New Fax Mode Check New SMB Mode Check New 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Address Registration Bz Address Registration does not appear if only account track settings have been specified and no user is logged on with an account Item Description E mail Destinations for E mail transmissions can be regis tered and viewed For details on registering refer to Registering an address book destination on page 10 35 Mode Check Press to view the details for the selected destina tion New Press to register a new destination Specify settings for No Name E mail Favor ites and Index 3 8 Address Registration Item Description Fax Fax destinations can be registered and viewed For details on registering refer to the Facsimile User s Guide Mode Check Press to view the details for the selected destina tion New Press to register a new destination Specify settings for No Name Fax number Favorites Index and Line Settings SMB Destinations for SMB transmissions c
100. the time for printing the report when Output Settings is set to Every day or 100 Daily Activity Report Settings Journal 100 Within 24 Hours Select a setting when Output Settings is set to Every day or 100 Daily Journal 100 Prints the information for the 100 most recent communication jobs Within 24 Hours Prints the information for a maximum 100 communication jobs within the past 24 hours TX Result Report Settings Always If TX Fails No Select the conditions for printing the transmis sion results report TX Result Report Image Settings ON OFF Select whether or not an image of the first page of the document is printed in the transmission results report TX Reserve Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a report is printed with timer transmissions Fax Settings Admin Settings PC Fax TX Error Report Settings ON OFF Select whether or not an error report is printed with PC fax transmissions Broadcast Report Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a results report is printed with broadcast transmissions Broadcast Result Report Settings All Dest Mode Once Select the conditions for printing the results report for broadcast transmissions All Dest Prints the report if transmission to all destinations was completed Mode Once
101. the time that a PC fax was sent from the computer Start Time Shows the time that transmission will begin Cause Shows the cause of the error For details check the margin of the report Name Shows the user name l Fax RX Error Report This report is printed if reception of an Internet fax failed Be With Admin Setting Fax Settings Fax Report l Fax RX Error Report whether or not to print the l Fax RX error report can be speci fied For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description From Shows the e mail address of the sender Receiving time Shows the time that reception began Cause Shows the cause of the reception error Subject Shows the subject text Printing reports lists 7 11 Address Book List Group List Program List These lists contain the information registered for the various destinations The procedure for printing a destinations list is described below Press the Utility Counter key Press Admin Settings Type in the administrator password and then press OK Press Address Registration Press Address Book Select the list to be printed OukRWNM To print Address Book list continue with step 7 To print the Group list continue with step 8 To print the Program list continue with step 7 Select the type of destinations to be printed on oo N If n
102. the wrapper to indicate the printing side Avoid Media that is folded wrinkled or excessively curled Double feeding remove the media and fan the sheets they may be sticking together Loading more than one type size weight of media in a tray at the same time Overfilling the trays Allowing the output tray to overfill the output tray has a 250 sheet capacity misfeeding may occur if you allow more than 250 sheets of media to accumu late at one time 13 4 Preventing Media Misfeeds Understanding the Media Path Understanding media path will help you locate media misfeeds 1 2 1 ADF media feed rollers 2 Document feed tray 3 Document output tray 4 Fuser unit 10 Print head unit 5 Duplex 11 Imaging unit 6 Tray 1 Manual feed tray 12 Transfer belt unit 7 Tray 4 optional lower feeder unit 13 Toner cartridge 8 Tray 3 optional lower feeder unit 14 Output tray 9 Tray 2 Understanding the Media Path 13 5 Clearing Media Misfeeds To avoid damage always remove misfed media gently without tearing it Any piece of media left in the machine whether large or small can obstruct the media path and cause further misfeeds Do not reload media that has misfed Note The image is not fixed on the media before the fusing process If you touch the printed surface the toner may stick to your hand
103. time set on the computer matches the time set on this machine If the specified transmission time is earlier than the current time set on this machine the fax will be sent on the following day Creating a fax cover sheet By selecting the FAX Cover Sheet check box in the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box the PC fax can be sent with a cover sheet attached In addition click Settings to display the FAX Cover Sheet Settings dialog box in order to change the settings for cover sheets In the FAX Cover Sheet Settings dialog box change the desired settings by switching between the Basic Recipient Sender and Image tabs FAX Cover Sheet Settings dialog box Item Description Cover Sheet Settings Select a set of cover sheet settings To change the settings for the selected cover sheet click Edit To save the selected cover sheet settings so they can be recalled later click Add after specifying the new settings Check Click to display an enlarged image of the layout Cover Size Specify the size of the cover sheet Basic tab Specify settings such as the style and usage con ditions Recipient tab Specify recipient information Sender tab Specify sender information Image tab Specify the file for the image added to the cover sheet Sending a PC fax Basic tab Item Description Style Select the desired cover sheet design
104. to auto matic reception Other wise perform the manual reception opera tion Memory is full Load paper if it is empty and then print the faxes stored in memory The telephone line is incorrectly connected Check the telephone line connection If it is dis connected connect it There may be a problem with the caller s fax machine Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly and then if the copy was printed correctly have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine Closed Network RX Password Enable may have been set to Yes If Closed Network RX Password Enable is set to Yes faxes can only be received from specific senders For details contact the administrator Problems when receiving faxes Symptom Cause Solution Reception is not possi ble The fax may have been sent with an incorrect Sub address for the specified F code If an incorrect Sub address is received a communication error occurs and the fax can not be received Have the sender check the Sub address on their fax machine Printing is not possible PC Fax RX Settings PC Fax RX Setting may have been set to ON Print the fax from the machine s memory Memory RX Memory RX may have been set to ON Print the fax from the machine s memory Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print
105. to enter To enter uppercase letters press To enter symbols press 1 24 To enter special characters such as accented characters press at To delete the character to the right of the cursor press Delete To move the cursor press lt or gt Bes Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel Bes To clear all entered text press the C key Text input Our Concern for Environmental Protection ENERGY STAR As an ENERGY STAR Partner we have determined that this machine meets the ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency What is an ENERGY STAR product An ENERGY STAR product has a special feature that allows it to automati cally switch to a low power mode after a period of inactivity An ENERGY STAR product uses energy more efficiently saves you money on utility bills and helps protect the environment Our Concern for Environmental Protection A 9 A 10 Our Concern for Environmental Protection Index Numerics 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet Interface port 1 4 A Accessibility ais sscesessessessecsessess ses sesses sees 3 2 Account track ee 2 15 2 16 Address Book 0 cccccesseeees 10 34 Address Registration 3 8 10 35 ADE coshescossvsssgsnsevenrdvoess ADF feed cover Admin Settings Address Registration 0 006 3 43 Administrator Registration
106. when the favorite settings are recalled Bes The settings for fax driver functions cannot be changed Bes To save the favorite settings as a file click Export To import exported favorite settings into the fax driver click Import This is useful when using the same settings on a different computer 5 14 Fax driver settings Using the phone book Adding frequently used recipients to a phone book allows you to recall them when sending faxes Use the FAX tab of the fax driver to add recipients to a phone book Adding recipients to a phone book The procedure for adding recipients to the phone book is described below 1 In the FAX tab of the fax driver click Phone Book Entry The Phone Book Entry dialog box appears 2 Select Personal List from the list on the left side of the phone book and then click Add New The Personal Information Personal List dialog box appears 3 In the Name FAX Number Company and Department boxes type the appropriate information When the entered name is printed on the fax cover sheet a title will not be included To provide the name with a title on the fax cover sheet enter the name with a title in the Name box Up to 80 characters can be entered in the Name Company and Department boxes Up to 38 characters including numbers between 0 and 9 hyphens spaces P and T can be entered in the FAX Number box To send a fax overseas enter the
107. 3 5 Clearing Media Misfeeds scssssssssssssserssssssesesssesseseesscsscssessessessessessesecseesoese 13 6 Mediaimisfeed indications 2 3 eiierestheese veces gantataaiesiere dl anette talent ered ts 13 6 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 00 0 cccecsescseseceeceeeceecessecsesevseseeeesseneeets 13 7 Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 3 4 s Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF 13 13 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex w 13 15 Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit cccccsecesceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaes 13 16 Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 Manual Feed Tray and Transfer Rolletisst ses ssio 2 tive E n tans ich newt T Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Solving Other Problems ssccsssssesees Solving Problems with Printing Quality Status error and service messages Status messages Error messages Waring Messages ioanen dees Gangs atti opie dened cede elt eget Operator Messages ai hen ethic egal onGl ioninahins Service MESSAGES 5 2ss3 025 setegecorenevez EE A R E ea Installing ACCESSOLICS cssecrececesrssrserserssssssssesseesesseeseesesseessessessesenseesenseesessecseess 14 1 Introduction sceeeee 14 2 Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 14 3 Kit Contents AA E count tiles Aa A wel h A ate ba Re Atk Mech hae 14 3 Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 00 ee ceceeseceseneeeceeceeeeceeserseceeeeceeseseeaees 14 4 Working Table WT PO1
108. 5 Device authentication cccccccscessscsscessseeecesseceecesseeeecssesseeceecsseeesecsseeeeeesseenes 2 15 External server authentication ccccccccsccsssessecsecescecsecsecessecseeeceecseceseeeneeeees 2 15 Logging in using the authentication AeVice ceeeeeeseesceeceeceseeteeeeaseneeneenee 2 16 With account track ccccccccsccsscescecsecsecesseceecessessecessesseeescesseeseecseseseecseceeeeeseeneeestees 2 16 3 Utility Settings csscsssssersersersssssssecsssessesessesssessessessessessessessessessessessassosssssessonsess Accessibility Meter Count Address Registration User Settings scsccssssscsssssssscsssssesssssssssssssssssersersessssssessessessessssssessessessessesensonse Machine Settings ocito iat n eesis one hiesa i i bes ded dele Copy Settings J icccrersroronasinieiiiin niinn i a doves CAI SCTLINGS SE TA N ET AEN AOE A N EN Print Settings oe ea ea a aE E Rd dace a E E deeded Pax Settings or ere a A R a ene aE e ar E A Ee A S eee Select Default Start App Admin Settings 0cs08 Machine Settings Administrator Registration cscecsseceecseeeceecseseesesevsceeseescsevsesaesenecsasseeeenanets Address Registration heiten nie a niniia anise dein ei ts Authentication Setting 0 0 00 teessesessssseecneesceseesenenecesecoecesseersneoesesseseesnenenes theme t cstcsssacevetit eyed nga Ee E r e sa External Memory Print Jo
109. 7 2 Reception J ODS arioso siie beeen cbse onbcoieeued skied ludanaed A T E ave Saseatees 7 2 Checking the job log teens onpi a erie bina A E a a ences 7 3 Transmission JODS int ae aE EAEE KEE E ERE 7 3 Reception Jobs ccccecsessessescescesceseesseseeseeecesceececsseesessceaecaecaecaecaseaseaeeaeeaeeseess 7 3 Printing reports lists cscccscsersersersessecsesseessessessesssssesscssessessessesseseaseeseeseeseaseess 7 4 ALY POS OF TEPOTtS NE E elaced ewtenelucpateses E EE 7 4 Fy pes of liSts icdoseiceek cscs ack oes dua dee acids Jas sce dde den dabede E els ccdvs sea EEES ESE Eae 7 5 Activity Repoti ieusi iarosrsirers ciated enecczensendesnessadesdeaasentedeas devselnaudetndnedusaeprenstottes 7 6 Items that are printed 7 6 TX Result Report 7 7 Items that are printed 7 7 Reservation TX Repott 7 8 Items that are printed 7 8 Broadcast Result Report 7 9 Items that are printed 7 9 Broadcast Reservation Report 7 10 Items that are printed 7 10 PC Fax TX Error Report ee enar eri eiei cen scucctectcatccuessvancessestecsacenseveadedteabecbeases 7 11 Ttems that are primted cc cececcescesescessesecesceeceseesceeceeceececeecaceaeeaceaeeaecaeeneenes 7 11 T Fax RX Error Report ccsssccsscseccecsieds onsets see thcce e n a a ai 7 11 Items that are printed 0 00 eececcesesseesessesscesceseeeeeeseceeceeceecsecacaceaceaeenecneensenee 7 11 Address Book List Group List Program Li
110. 7 9 Finishing Specify any settings for finishing outputted copies Item Description Sort Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of the full document Group Select this setting when making multiple copies of documents containing multiple pages so that they will be automatically separated into sets of each page Auto Select this option to automatically switch between Sort and Group depending on the number of printable sheets per copy Group is set when printing a single sheet in the 1 sided or 2 sided mode and Sort is set when printing multiple sheets Proof Copy Before printing a large number of copies a single finished proof copy can be printed in order to be checked Select whether or not to print a proof copy Item Description ON Select this setting to print a proof copy OFF Select this setting to not print a proof copy Proof Copy operation Bes When printing a proof copy specify multiple copies 1 In the home screen press Copy 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF Bes For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 3 Specify the copy settings 4 Press Proof Copy 7 10 Finishing
111. Bes The Save As dialog box appears only the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book When the phone book is subse quently edited the Save As dialog box does not appear and the existing file is automatically overwritten The saved phone book file automatically appears the next time that the phone book is opened To open a different phone book file click the File menu in the Phone Book Entry dialog box and then click Open If multiple phone book files have been saved you can switch between these files to locate the desired one To create a new phone book file click the File menu in the Phone Book Entry dialog box and then click New On the File menu click Save As to save the file with a different name Be The phone book file is saved with the csv extension Editing a phone book Editing or organizing a phone book for example by changing the registered personal information or group name enhances its usability Changing personal information Select the name of the recipient to be edited under Personal List on the left side of the phone book and then click Edit The Personal Information dia log box appears which is the same as that for adding a recipient so that the information can be changed 5 16 Using the phone book To delete a recipient select the name of the recipient under Personal List on the left side of the phone book and then click Delete At the same tim
112. Custom Size Specify the size of the document if it is a non stan dard size Press X and Y and then type in the document size X can be set between 148 mm and 356 mm 5 83 inches and 14 00 inches Y can be set between 140 mm and 216 mm 5 51 inches and 8 50 inches Long Original Select whether or not a long original document is to be sent A document with a maximum length of 1 000 mm can be sent To send a long document press ON es Long documents can only be scanned using the ADF Double sided long documents cannot be scanned Simplex Duplex Select whether double sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used Item Description 1 sided Select this setting when scanning a single sided document 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document 3 18 Specifying document settings Cover 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document with a cover page Only the front side of the first page will be scanned and then both the front and back sides of the remaining pages will be scanned Binding Position Specify the binding position when sending a double sided document using the ADF The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double sided document will be bound at the top or at the left Item Description Left Bind Select this setting for binding
113. F and the maximum storage humidity is 85 noncondensing If the toner cartridge is moved from a cold place to a warm humid place condensation may occur degrading print quality Allow the toner to adapt to the environment for about one hour before use Replacing Consumables Level during handling and storage Do not turn cartridges upside down the toner inside the cartridges may become caked or unequally distributed E Away from salty air and corrosive gases such as aerosols Replacing Consumables 11 5 Replacing a Toner Cartridge Note Be careful not to spill toner while replacing a toner cartridge If toner spills immediately wipe it off with a soft dry cloth When the toner is empty the message Replace Toner x appears in the touch panel Follow the instructions below to replace the toner cartridge As an example the procedure for replacing the yellow toner cartridge is described below 1 Open the machine s front cover Replacing Consumables 2 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartridge indicated to the left The replacement procedure for the toner cartridge is the same for all colors yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge Y 3 Grab the handle of the toner car tridge to be replaced and then pull out the cartridge The followi
114. Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified Useful reception functions 4 7 E Set Closed Network RX Password Enable to Yes E With Closed Network RX Password Password specify the password for allowing the machine to be used with closed network receptions e For details on the settings refer to Closed Network RX Password on page 2 15 Fax forwarding G3 fax Internet fax Fax forwarding is the function for forwarding received documents to the previ ously specified destination In order to use fax forwarding the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting to ON E With Forward TX Settings Forwarding Address specify the fax num ber of the forwarding destination E With Forward TX Settings Forward amp Print select whether or not this machine also prints the fax when it is forwarded Bes For details on the settings refer to Forward TX Settings on page 2 15 Bes An Internet fax destination cannot be specified as the forwarding des tination Bey If a document with a resolution of 300 x 300 dpi is received as an Internet fax this machine prints the document without forwarding it es This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception memory reception or night reception E mail forwarding G3 fax Internet fax E mail forwarding is the function for
115. Folder Settings Header Footer Header Position Settings Security Fax TX Header Settings Name Restore Footer Position Defaults 2 4 Fax Settings Admin Settings HDD Format Comm Settings PB DP Paper Empty RX Mode Restriction Number of RX Code Settings Call Rings Redial Redial Interval Line Monitor Line Monitor Volume Ring Pattern Manual RX V 34 OFF Function Inch Paper Settings Priority Paper Priority Print Paper Size Tray Selection for RX Print Min Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages Duplex Print RX Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 5 Fax Function Settings F Code TX Dest Check Display Func Confirm Addr TX Confirm Addr Register Restrict Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Restrict PC Fax TX Restrict Inter net Fax TX Restrict Inter net Fax RX Memory RX Memory RX Password Closed Network RX Password Enable Password Forward TX Settings Forward TX Setting Forwarding Address Forward amp Print 2 6
116. For details on the initial Fax screen refer to Initial Fax screen on page 1 8 2 Position the document to be faxed For details on loading the original document refer to Positioning the original document on page 3 4 3 Press Settings and then select the appropriate settings on the Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens For details on the Scan Settings screen refer to Specifying scan settings on page 3 11 For details on the Comm Settings screen refer to Specifying com munication settings G3 fax on page 3 13 and Useful transmission functions G3 fax on page 3 14 For details on the Original Settings screen refer to Specifying docu ment settings on page 3 18 Press Off Hook Make sure that Send is selected Ook Specify the destination Press to select a registered destination Press the Mode Memory key to select a program destination T After the fax answer tone is heard press Start or press the Start key The document is scanned and transmission begins 3 22 Faxing manually G3 fax If the fax cannot be sent automatic redialing G3 fax If the fax could not be sent correctly for example if the line is busy or a com munication error occurred a message appears informing that the number will be redialed after a certain length of time A fax that could not be sent becomes a queued transmission and t
117. HOST port dur ing printing External Memory 6 3 Selecting the type of files to be displayed 1 In the home screen press USB HDD 2 Press External Memory 3 Press File Type 4 Select the type of files to be displayed 5 Press OK ID amp Print If a job is printed on this machine with user authentication through the printer driver using the registered user or public user privilege it is saved as an ID amp Print job on the hard disk of this machine Bey When using batch printing for an ID amp Print job the copying cannot be interrupted Printing simultaneously with log in 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list 2 Press Begin Printing 3 Press Login The user is authenticated and printing starts Specifying a job to print 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list Press Access Basic Screen Press Login This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen In the home screen press USB HDD Press ID amp Print Select Login User or Public User as the user who sends a job Select the job to be printed Press Print CONOR ON ID amp Print Deleting a job 1 OONDOIR ON Specify a name and password fo
118. ISO11 ISO15 ISO17 ISO21 ISO6O ISO69 ISOL1 ISOL2 ISOL5 ISOL6 ISOL9 Legal Maths MCText MSPUBL PC775 PC850 PC852 PC858 PC8DN PC8TK PC1004 Pi Font PS math PS Text Roman 8 WIN30 WIN Balt WINL1 WINL2 WINL5 ARABIC8 HPWARA PC864ARA HEBREW7 HEBREWS ISOHEB PC862HEB ISOCYR PC866CYR WINCYR PC866UKR Greek 8 WIN GRK PC851GRK PC8GRK ISOGRK Specify the symbol set used with the PCL lan guage 3 62 Admin Settings XPS Specify XPS settings Digital Signature Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable XPS digital sig natures Enable XPS digital signatures are enabled Disable XPS digital signatures are disabled Print XPS Errors Settings ON OFF Select whether or not an error report is printed after an XPS error has occurred ON The error report is printed OFF The error report is not printed Fax Settings Specify the fax settings For details on specifying the fax settings refer to the Facsimile User s Guide Maintenance Menu Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Print Menu Specify settings for printing event logs and gra dations Event Log Settings Print Can
119. If the fax driver must be removed for example when reinstallation of the driver is necessary remove the driver using the following procedure 1 Click Start and then click All Programs or Programs KONICA MINOLTA xxxxx model name Uninstall Printer Driver 2 Select the components to be removed and then click Uninstall Continue by following the instructions that appear 3 If a dialog box appears instructing you to restart the computer click OK Uninstalling the fax driver 5 19 5 20 Uninstalling the fax driver Registering destinations Destination registration By registering destinations where faxes are frequently sent recipients can be recalled allowing a fax to easily be sent With this machine address book destinations Address Book group destinations Group and program desti nations Program can be registered Address Book The information for destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be regis tered A destination can selected from the address book when a fax is being sent A maximum of 2 000 address book destinations can be registered For details on registering refer to Registering an address book destination on page 6 3 Group Multiple address book destinations can be registered together as a group This is useful when sending the same fax to multiple destinations in a broad cast transmission A maximum of 100 group destinations with a maximum of 500 addre
120. Media Misfeeds The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns If you get burned immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical attention Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller 13 18 Clearing Media Misfeeds 5 Close the fuser unit cover 6 Push down the 2 levers T Close the right door 13 19 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from Tray 1 Manual Feed Tray and Transfer Roller 1 Pull the lever and then open the right door Bes Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media 13 20 Clearing Media Misfeeds The area around the fuser unit is extremely hot Touching anything other than the indicated levers may result in burns If you get burned immediately cool the skin under cold water and then seek professional medical attention Note Decreased print quality may result if the surface of the image transfer belt or the transfer roller is touched Be careful not to touch the surface of the image transfer belt or transfer roller Clearing Media Misfeeds 13 21 3 Close the right door Clearing Media Misfeeds
121. Memory RX Memory RX to ON E With Memory RX Password specify the password for allowing docu ments saved in the memory to be used Bes For details on the settings refer to Memory RX on page 2 15 Bz This function cannot be used together with PC fax reception fax for warding E mail forwarding or night reception Using received documents The procedure for using a document saved in the memory is described below Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen Press Others Press Memory RX Type in the password and then press OK The list of documents saved in the memory is displayed 0O AON Select the document to be printed and then press Print To delete the selected document press Delete The document is printed Bes Received documents can be retrieved by using PageScope Web Con nection For details refer to the Reference Guide Closed network reception G3 fax Closed network reception is the function for accepting only transmissions from sender s machines with a matching password This function can only be used if the sender s fax machine is equipped with a password transmission function If this machine is set for closed network receptions the sender s fax machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network reception password specified on this machine In order to use closed network reception the following settings in the
122. NC assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this guide or for incidental special or conse quential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide or the use of this guide in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT This package contains the following materials provided by KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC KMBT software included as part of the printing system Printing Software the digitally encoded machine readable outline data encoded in the special format and in the encrypted form Font Programs other software which runs on a computer system for use in conjunction with the Printing Software Host Software and related explanatory writ ten materials Documentation The term Software shall be used to describe Printing Soft ware Font Programs and or Host Software and also include any upgrades modified versions additions and copies of the Software The Software is being licensed to you under the terms of this Agreement KMBT grants to you a non exclusive sublicense to use the Software and Documentation pro vided that you agree to the following 1 You may use the Software and accompanying Font Programs for imaging to the licensed output device s solely for your own internal business purposes 2 In addition to the license for Font Programs set forth in Section 1 above y
123. No Reset the transfer belt counter Transfer Roller Settings Yes No Unit Reset the transfer roller counter Fusing Unit Settings Yes No Reset the fuser unit counter Folder Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Auto Del Interval Settings Erase Disabled 12 Hours 1 Day 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days 30 Days Select the length of time until files saved on the hard disk are automatically deleted Auto Document Delete Settings Erase Disabled 12 Hours 1 Time Day 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days 30 Days Select the length of time that files are saved on the hard disk Document Hold Setting Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not a file is deleted after it is retrieved Admin Settings 3 69 Security Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Administrator Password Settings 12345678 Change the administrator password Specify the administrator password as a 0 to 8 digit number Bes If password rules have been applied an 8 digit password must be specified Be If the administrator password is incorrectly entered three times machine operations are locked If this occurs turn the machine off then on again Password top Type in the current password Password bottom Type in
124. PC fax reception memory reception fax forwarding or E mail forwarding Useful reception functions Printing received faxes This section describes how received faxes are printed Determining the paper size The following describes the guidelines for determining the most suitable paper size and the size of paper that will be printed on to Function Settings on page 2 12 Bey For details on the paper settings for printing received documents refer Step 1 Determining the most suitable paper size Based on the following rules the most suitable paper size is automatically determined from the width and length of the received document Width of Inch Paper Footer Length of Paper size received Priority Position received that was document document determined fixed at A4 mm most suitable paper size A4 width OFF RX Ft OFF 1 000 or less A4 or Inside Body Text Outside Body 1 000 or less A4 Text ON RX Ft OFF 292 or less Letter or Inside 293 1000 Legal Body Text Outside Body 284 or less Letter Text 285 1000 Legal Printing received faxes 4 11 Step 2 Determining the actual paper size used for printing The machine checks if paper of the most suitable size determined in step 1 is loaded E f paper of the most suitable size is loaded printing begins E f paper of the most suitable size is not loaded or if the Auto Tray Switch functi
125. Secured Job setting type in the pass word Type in the number of copies to be printed and then press OK Deleting a job saved on the hard disk OukRwWN In the home screen press USB HDD Press Proof Print Select a user Press OK Select the job to be deleted Press Delete Bes If the job was saved with the Secured Job setting type in the pass word T Press Yes and then press OK Proof Print External Memory PDF XPS JPEG and TIFF files saved on USB memory devices can be printed by plugging the USB memory device into the machine Printing from a connected USB memory device 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port appears at the bottom of the screen 2 In the home screen press USB HDD 3 Press External Memory 4 Press File List 5 Select the file to be printed If the file to be printed is in a folder select the folder and then press Open To return to the folder containing the one that is currently dis played press Up Ees At each folder level a maximum of 99 folders and files can be dis played Bey The names of folders are displayed given priority over the names of files Bes A maximum of eight folder levels can be displayed Bes If JPEG and TIFF files are not displayed select the file type with File Type 6 Press OK T Specify the print settings 8 Press Print Sz Do not unplug the USB memory device from the USB
126. Select the setting for digital signatures Encryption Method Settings RC2 40 RC2 64 RC2 128 DES 3DES AES 128 AES 192 AES 256 Select the encryption method for the body of E mail messages Admin Settings 3 47 Auto Obtain Certifi cates Settings Yes No Select whether or not to automatically obtain certificates Print S MIME Informa tion Settings Yes No Select whether or not to print S MIME informa tion External Memory Print Description Settings Enable Disable function Select whether or not to enable the External Memory Print Job Timeout Description Settings 5 to 300 Default 15 Specify the length of time until a job timeout occurs Copy Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Specify Tray When APS __ Settings Tray Before APS ON Default OFF Tray Select which paper tray is selected when the automatic tray switching feature APS is dis abled Paper Priority Settings Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Specify the paper tray that is normally used Be Tray3 and Tray4 do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed 3 48 Admin Settings Print Settings Bes All factory default values a
127. Settings Print Paper Paper Tray Settings Settings Settings Duplex Copies Collate Auto Tray Switching Default Tray Tray 1 Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Tray 2 Paper Size Custom Size Paper Type Tray 3 Paper Size Paper Type Tray 4 Paper Size Paper Type User Settings 3 11 f Tray Mapping Tray Mapping Mode Logical Tray 0 Logical Tray 1 Logical Tray 2 Logical Tray 3 Logical Tray 4 Logical Tray 5 Logical Tray 6 Logical Tray 7 Logical Tray 8 Logical Tray 9 Print Reports Configura tion Page Statistics Page Font List PS PCL HDD Direc tory List Counter List Print 3 12 User Settings i Fax Settings Enabled Remote RX No Remote RX Settings Default Fax Activity Display Fax Fax TX Fax RX d Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press User Settings Machine Settings Bes User Settings is not displayed when the job log is full Bey All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Language Settings English French Italian German Spanish Po
128. The essentials of imaging KONICA MINOLTA bizhub c35 User s Guide Copy Print Scan Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35 You have made an excellent choice Your bizhub C35 is specially designed for optimal performance in Windows Macintosh and Linux environments Trademarks Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Adobe the Adobe logo and Photoshop are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Apple and the Apple logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries DIC and the DIC logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DIC Corporation in the United States and or other countries Ethernet is a registered trademark or trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States and or other countries IEEE and the IEEE logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc in the United States and or other countries Mac and Mac OS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries NETWARE is a registered trademark or trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and or other countries Pentium is registered trademark or trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and or other
129. The fol lowing types of recipient boxes are available E Confidential TX The fax will be sent to a confidential box on the recipient s machine Type in the box number for Sub Address and type in the communication password for Password E Relay TX The fax will be sent to a relay box if the recipient s machine is equipped with a relay transmission function Type in the relay box number for Sub Address and type in the relay password for Password Bes This function can be used if the recipient s fax machine is compatible with F codes Bey Confidential communication is the function for using a confidential box to receive a document to be sent to a specific person In order to send a confidential transmission from this machine a confidential box and password must be specified on the recipient s fax machine Useful transmission functions G3 fax 3 15 Be Relay transmission is the function for sending a document to a relay station which then broadcasts the document to the recipients In order to send a relay transmission a relay box number relay password and destination group number must be specified on the recipient s machine used as a relay station This machine cannot be used as a relay station This function cannot be used together with password transmissions or polling reception If information was incorrectly entered press the C key to erase the entered information 3 16 Useful transmission f
130. Therefore be sure to leave the machine turned on Automatic reception Select this mode when using the telephone line as a dedicated fax line When the specified number of rings is detected fax reception begins automatically In order to receive faxes automatically the following settings in the Fax Set tings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Comm Settings RX Mode to Auto RX E With Comm Settings Number of RX Call Rings to specify how many rings are produced before the machine begins receiving the fax Bes For details on the settings refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 Receiving G3 faxes Manual reception Select this mode if an external telephone is connected and it is frequently used to make phone calls Manual reception can be performed either with the control panel of this machine or with an external telephone In order to receive faxes manually the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Comm Settings RX Mode to Manual RX E With Comm Settings Manual RX V 34 OFF specify that V 34 is auto matically turned off during manual reception Bey For details on the settings refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 With the control panel The procedure for manually receiving a fax from the control panel is described below 1 When the external telephone rings press Off Hook in the initial Fax scre
131. Type in the E mail address 4 Press OK es To specify multiple destinations specify all destinations where the data is to be sent Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions 1 In the initial Scan to E mail mode screen press Log Specifying destinations 10 15 2 Select the destination from the list and then press the Start key Bey Only one destination can be selected from the log Bes The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing Direct Input In addition destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is fre quently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent with out the trouble of specifying the various settings Bes In order to select a program destination the program destination must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering a program destination on page 10 36 Press Scan to E mail to display the i
132. Using a computer application create the data to be sent On the File menu click Print name such as xxxxxxx FAX 3 From the Printer Name box select the installed printer appears with a If necessary click Properties or Preferences and then change the fax driver settings Ol For details refer to Fax driver settings on page 5 8 Click Print The FAX Transmission Popup dialog box appears O In the Name and FAX Number boxes type the appropriate information Up to 80 characters can be entered in the Name box Up to 38 characters including numbers between 0 and 9 hyphens P and T can be entered in the FAX Number box To send a fax overseas enter the country code at the beginning of the fax number ECM Select this check box to use ECM error correction mode If the V 34 Mode check box is selected this check box cannot be cleared V 34 Mode Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmis sion mode Select this check box for ordinary operation clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient s machine To specify a fax number registered in the address book of this machine click Add from Address Book For details refer to Select ing a recipient from the address book on page 5 4 To specify a fax number registered in the phone book click Add From Phone Book For details refer to Selecting
133. a E EE EEA 10 4 Original Size erior eA Ai EAA EE Aini AE aTa 10 5 Original Settings Separate Scan ce cececeeceseeteeseesecsecseceeeaeeseeneeseeneeneees 10 5 Original Settings Original Direction 00 0 cece cseeeceeeeeecneeeceesneeecneeees 10 6 Original Settings Orig Binding Position cceceseeseeseeecseereeneeneeneees 10 6 ColoreMode E E E E E AEE 10 7 Original Typ froisser iii ii 10 7 Specifying Scari SettihgSssoriensiiiinin i n iE E E EE E N 10 8 Backeround Density srpenninni i hhi r ta 10 8 RESO ItIOM irinin toire ii aE T EEE EET S 10 8 Ele Settines File Type k ornin oeae a A A 10 9 File Settings Scan Setting 0 0 cee csseeseeescneeeceecseeecseceesecsesevsessesenecseeees 10 9 File Settings PDF Encrypt 0 cee esseeeeeeseneeeceseeeeceeees 10 10 Specifying communication SettINgS eee ceseseesecsecsececeececesceseeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeees 10 12 Binary Division cccecescesseeseeseescescescesceseceeceeceecesesaeaesaeaecaecaueaseaseeseeseess 10 12 E mail Encryption 00 0 cccceccecseeesscesceseeseeecceececeecaceaeeaeaecaecseeaseaeeaeeeseeaeees 10 12 Send Use Signature ccccccecseesesscescesceseeseeseeeeceeceaceseeseeaceaecaecaaeaaeeeeseeseess 10 12 E mail cece 10 12 Specifying destinations Selecting from registered destinations 10 14 Selecting from the Favorites list ccccsccsscescssesseeseesecseceeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeee
134. a recipient from the phone book on page 5 3 Sending a PC fax To add the entered name and fax number to the Simple Entry folder of the phone book click Register To Phone Book T Click Add Recipients To send a fax to multiple recipients repeat steps 6 and 7 Up to 100 recipients can be registered To remove a registered recipient click Delete From List 8 To change the fax mode settings click Fax Mode Setting Details To specify a fax cover sheet select the FAX Cover Sheet check box For details refer to Specifying transmission conditions on page 5 4 and Creating a fax cover sheet on page 5 5 9 Click OK The fax data is sent via this machine Selecting a recipient from the phone book By clicking Add From Phone Book in the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box the recipients of the PC fax can be selected from the phone book Bes Before using the phone book register the name and fax number of the recipient For details refer to Using the phone book on page 5 15 1 When sending a fax click Add From Phone Book in the FAX Transmis sion Popup dialog box Select Personal List or Group from the list on the left side of the phone book to display the desired recipient under Personal Information To search for recipients by specifying conditions click Find 3 Select a recipient name under Personal Information and then click Add Recipients
135. able area constraints If you can cus tom size your page in your application use those sizes given for the imagea ble area for optimum results Print Media 4 13 Loading Media How do I load media Note Do not mix media of different types and sizes as this will cause media misfeeds or machine trouble Note Paper edges are sharp and may cause injuries When refilling media first remove any media remaining in the tray Stack it with the new media even the edges then reload it Tray 1 Manual Feed Tray For details on the types and sizes of media that can be printed from Tray 1 refer to Specifications on page 4 2 Loading Plain Paper Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Open Tray 1 4 14 Loading Media 2 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space between them 3 Press down on the center of the paper lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs white lock into place 4 Load the paper face down in the tray Loading Media 4 15 Bey Do not load so much paper that the top of the stack is higher than the maximum limit guide Up to 100 sheets 80 g m of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper 6 Select Copy Paper Tray 1 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also
136. achine Settings on page 3 13 Specifying destinations 10 27 Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered they can be specified as Favorites As a default the Favorites destination list appears when the initial Scan to Folder mode screen is displayed Select a destination from the list To specify multiple destinations for a broad cast transmission specify all destinations where the data is to be sent es The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered For details refer to Registering an address book destination on page 10 35 Selecting with an index search Destinations can be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press LA 2 Press the desired index tab to search for destinations f the desired index tab is not displayed press or lt until the desired tab appears To select a group destination press and then press Group on the rightmost end 3 Select the destination and then press OK To specify multiple destinations specify all destinations where the data is to be sent Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press AA 2 Press Search 3 Select the method to search
137. aeaecaecaecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 5 18 Uninstalling the fax driver cscccsssssecsessecsessessessesssessessesesssscssesseeseeseeseeseeseeseeee 5 19 6 Registering destinations ssccscsssersersersersessssssssscssesssessesecssesscssessessesseseeseeseeseess 6 1 Destination registration cccssssssersersersersscsscsessscssssssssesssessessessessessessessessesseseess 6 2 Address Book miiasir ets eed AAS Anette Bt Seville aR 6 2 GrOUP castes Seiad den Rita ial ee eae oh esses Bead ee kas 6 2 PROSTAMM eve secveadeteeien ds actang staal cdseale tendolelveac ee Rene RA abc spa a aais Read wee eal ewe eek 6 2 Registering an address book destination sssessessessscscsssessssssssessesssseseesesseers 6 3 G3 LAK cdestiecivitres aaa dda die bended ct Shane cee PA EEA desde anes 6 3 Aaa Y A REE E tates eRe AE N A N 6 4 Internet fax sicscccset tere e a E E E E E E cet R E 6 5 Registering a program destination ssessesesseseecsseeesesesoesesoseeoesecoesescsseoesoseesesesoeeeseseeee 6 6 7 Communication management e sesesseseseeeesesecoesesoseeeesesosseeesoeeesoseeoesesoeseocseeeesesesoeeeseee 7 1 Checking a job sscscssssssssceccscssesssssrsessessessessecsecsecsscscessessessessesessessessassessessessesense 7 2 Checking jobs being performed cc ececcesseseesececeececesescecsecsecsecaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 2 TransMissiOnjODS 4 c3 cchiclsiaidelecsecHessistalieebelesohsotdey abdsd Gudebcelesebslaatiaibasienss
138. age whether or not to print a reduced image of the sent document in the TX Result Report can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Bey With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report Confirm TX Result Report whether or not to print the transmission results report before transmission can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description Destination Shows the registration name or address of the destination Start Time Shows the time that transmission began Time Shows the length of time required for transmis sion Prints Shows the number of pages sent Result Shows the results of the transmission For details check the margin of the report Note Shows remarks regarding the transmission For details check the margin of the report Printing reports lists Reservation TX Report This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions The Reservation TX Report is printed automatically when a timer transmis sion is queued Bes With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report TX Reserve whether or not to print the Reservation TX Report can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description Destination Shows the registration name or address of the destination Create Time
139. age 1 13 have been correctly specified The e mail address for the destination is incor rect Check that the regis tered destination infor mation is correct The cables are not con nected correctly Check that the cables are correctly connected PC fax Symptom Cause Solution The message Printer is The fax driver specified Check the specified not connected or Print Error appears on the computer screen when sending may not be supported by the printer controller printer name The network or USB cable may be discon nected Check that the cable is correctly connected An error may have occurred on this machine Check the control panel of this machine Memory may be insuffi cient Check whether a test page can be sent 8 4 Problems when sending faxes Symptom Cause Solution Print processing on the computer finished but transmission does not start The fax driver specified when sending may not be supported by the printer controller Check the specified printer name The network or USB cable may be discon nected Check that the cable is correctly connected An error may have occurred on this machine Check the control panel of this machine Unprocessed jobs may remain queued on this machine From the control panel of this machine check the Job screen for the pro cess
140. ail Press to enter Scan to E mail mode For details on the Scan to E mail mode operations refer to Performing Scan to E mail mode opera tions on page 10 3 4 Scan to Folder Press to enter Scan to Folder mode For details on the Scan to Folder mode operations refer to Performing Scan to Folder mode opera tions on page 10 17 5 Copy Press to enter Copy mode For details on the Copy mode operations refer to Performing Copy mode operations on page 7 1 6 Date time Shows the current date and time Touch panel screens 2 5 No Indication Description 7 USB HDD Press to print files on a USB memory device Press to print a print job saved on hard disk 8 Status Press to view information on consumables and devices 9 Job Press to check a print transmission reception or stored data job 10 Toner supply Shows the amount of toner remaining for yellow Y indicators magenta M cyan C and black K Touch panel screens Initial Copy mode screen Copy Copies Ready to Copy lt a co 2 02 03 2009 20 12 4 3 No Indication Description 1 Number of cop Indicates the specified number of copies ies 2 Copy mode Press to display the corresponding screen for speci operations fying various settings 3 Mode Check Press to check the currently specified copy settings a Press to
141. ail Halftones are reproduced with detail Smooth Halftones are reproduced with smoothness Admin Settings 3 51 Graphics Printing Settings Line Art Detail Smooth Select how halftones in graphics are repro duced Line Art Halftones are reproduced with high precision Detail Halftones are reproduced with detail Smooth Halftones are reproduced with smoothness Edge Enhancement Select how edges in images text and graphics are emphasized Image Printing Settings ON OFF Select whether image edges are emphasized ON The edges are emphasized OFF The edges are not emphasized Text Printing Settings ON OFF Select whether text edges are emphasized ON The edges are emphasized OFF The edges are not emphasized Graphics Printing Settings ON OFF Select whether graphics edges are empha sized ON The edges are emphasized OFF The edges are not emphasized Edge Strength Settings OFF Low Middle High Select the desired amount that edges are emphasized OFF The edges are not emphasized Low The edges are slightly emphasized Middle The edges are emphasized by an average amount High The edges are highly emphasized 3 52 Admin Settings Economy Print Settings ON OFF Select whethe
142. aling P appears in the screen Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing This has no effect on the dialing 3 8 Specifying destinations 4 Press OK Be If Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Function Settings Cofirm Addr TX is set to ON the fax number must be entered again after OK is pressed To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission press Next Dest after the fax number was entered and then type in the next fax number If the machine is being used with a PBX press Pause after the out side line access number for example 0 for reliable dialing when transmitting from an inside line to an outside line Internet fax 1 In the initial Fax screen press Direct Input 2 Press Internet Fax 3 Type in the E mail address 4 Press OK Bes To specify multiple destinations specify all destinations where the data is to be sent Selecting from the log A destination can be selected from the log of the last five transmissions 1 In the initial Fax screen press Others 2 Press Log 3 Select the destination and then press OK Bey Only addresses that have been directly typed in remain in the log Bes Selecting destinations from the log is possible only for jobs with a sin gle destination Bez When the machine is turned off the transmission log is cleared Be If Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Function Settings Co
143. an be regis tered and viewed For details on registering refer to Registering an address book destination on page 10 35 Mode Check Press to view the details for the selected destina tion New Press to register a new destination Specify settings for No Name Connection Host Name File Path User ID Password Favorites and Index Address Registration User Settings From the User Settings screen various settings are available to be changed by the user User Settings Machine Settings Language Measurement Unit Setting Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Switch Enable ATS APS Tray 1 ACS Level Scan to E mail Default Tab Fax Default Tab Scan to Folder Default Tab Copy Settings Auto Zoom for Combine Default Copy Settings Separate Scan Output Method Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 3 10 User Settings Scan JPEG Settings Compression Level Black Compression Level Default Scan
144. arts ooo eee Fax Report c ccccccecsesesseseseseeteteseees 2 18 Memory reception Fax Target siiisisstvisei asnaiessetsc 2 20 Mode Memory secsssreeeeeen Forward TX Settings eee 2 15 Function Settings occ eee 2 12 N roca ay me Night reception c ccceeeee 4 10 Memory RX oo eececeeeseeseeeereeneeeees 2 15 Nighttime RX Settings 0 2 17 O PBX Connection Settings 2 17 OfP HOOK oocccecccccccceccceccccececececcececeeeecee PC Fax RX Settings 0 eee 2 16 Original glass Remote RX Settings 00 eee 2 16 Original Settings 7 Sender Settings eee seers 2 8 Binding Position c csseeeeeeeee 3 19 Fax Settings User Settings 2 2 Long Original o cceeeceseeeen 3 18 FOOLED a sissss sccssetiestecesteesesseesessessesstsan s 4 14 Original Size ccceecesesesesseeeeeeeee 3 18 Simplex Duplex cece eeeceeeeeeeeeee 3 18 G GTOUP erorar cheno ens est cae aE ETATO 6 2 P Group Address List 0 00 00 7 12 l ET a AEE EEAS EN 1 2 H FAX Cover Sheet cceeeeeeeeeeees CAMO 5 ccscesccssessesseseedeccsesteseesesenssesense Homescreen Phone book seeeeeeensnsseseeeeennennnsseeetecy Transmission operation Phone book 03 scs5siiccsdicesesstuvsteesse senses I Polling reception COD kin irarria 1 9 Printing received faxes Program ue Program Address c ceseeeeeeees J Program Address List
145. at the left Top Bind Select this setting for binding at the top Auto Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position If the document length is 297 mm 11 69 inches or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected If the document length is more than 297 mm 11 69 inches a binding position along the short side of the paper is selected Specifying document settings 3 19 Sending to multiple destinations broadcast transmissions The same document can be sent to multiple destinations with a single opera tion If all of the desired destinations are selected when sending the fax the same document will be sent to each of the specified destinations A broadcast transmission can be specified as a timer transmission Use any of the following methods to specify destinations for broadcast trans missions Mg Selecting from registered destinations up to 500 destinations page 3 7 Directly typing in the address up to 100 destinations including the desti nations with an LDAP search page 3 8 Selecting with an LDAP search up to 100 destinations including the des tinations with direct input page 3 10 Selecting a group destination page 3 7 Selecting a program destination page 3 21 Bey For details on destination types and their registration procedures refer to Registering destinations on page 6 1 The results of the broadcast transmission
146. ation For details refer to Print have Settings on page 3 49 page to Pag One or more of the Remove the toner cartridges and e variation toner cartridges may check for damage If it is damaged be defective replace it The media is moist Remove the moist media and replace it from humidity with new dry media The color One or more of the Remove the imaging units and check has a poor imaging units may be for damage If it is damaged replace it reproduction defective or has poor color density Printer Printer Printer Printer If the problem is not resolved even after all of the above have been per formed contact Technical Support with the error information Solving Problems with Printing Quality 13 37 Status error and service messages Various status error and service messages appear in the touch panel of the control panel They provide information about the machine and help you locate problems that may have occurred Check the message that appears and then perform the necessary steps Status messages Message Cause Solution Initializing The machine was No action is required turned on Restarting The machine is being restarted Enter Power Save mode The machine is enter ing normal operation mode from Power Save mode Calibrating The image is being adjusted Warming up The machine is warm ing up or AIDC is being performed Check settin
147. ation Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 Bes With an HDD transmission only one destination can be specified Bey Scan data saved on the hard disk can be saved to a computer by copying it with PageScope Web Connection For details refer to the Reference Guide With Web Service Settings With a Web Service transmission scan data can be sent to a previously reg istered network computer Network computers where this machine is registered as a Web Service scan ner appear as destinations Select a destination 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input 2 Press Web Service Settings 3 Select the destination f the desired destination is not displayed press Search and then type in the destination name to be searched for Specifying destinations 10 31 Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 Bes With a Web Service transmission only one destination can be speci fied Bes With WSD scanning on Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 it may not be possible to specify a resolution or document size Selecting from the log A destination can be selecte
148. ation is performed with a server Click Server Setting and then select a server Account Track If account track settings have been specified on this machine specify in the Department Name and Password boxes the settings specified on the machine up to 8 characters Bes If a fax is sent using a user name and password or account name and password that are not registered on the machine or if a fax is sent without the User Authentication or Account Track settings specified in the driver the fax is deleted without being authenticated by the machine Even if the user or account has been registered on the machine the PC fax may not be sent if use of the fax function is not permitted Layout tab The settings available on the Layout tab are described below Item Description Combination Select this check box to combine the pages of a multi page document into a single sheet or divide a single document page into multiple sheets when faxing Click Combination Details to specify vari ous details Bes Sending documents containing pages of different sizes or orientations in one job may cause some images to be partially lost or to overlap 5 12 Fax driver settings Configure tab The settings available on the Configure tab are described below Item Description Device Option Specify the status of the options installed on this machine
149. ay 2 Paper width 92 to 216 mm Paper length 148 to 356 mm Envelopes with a width of 220 mm can be printed from Tray 1 manual feed tray Tray 3 Tray4 optional A4 B5 Executive Letter Government Legal Legal Paper types Label Plain paper 60 to 90 g m Recycled 60 to 90 g m Envelopes Letterhead Thick 1 91 to 150 g m Thick 2 151 to 210 g m E Postcard m Glossy 1 100 to 128 g m m Glossy 2 129 to 158 g m Em Single side only 60 to 90 g m E Special paper 60 to 90 g m Technical specifications Paper capacity Tray 1 Plain Recycled Single side only Spe manual cial paper feed tray 100 sheets Envelope 10 envelopes Label Postcard Thick 1 Thick 2 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Letterhead 20 sheets Tray 2 Plain Recycled Single side only Spe cial paper 250 sheets Label Postcard Thick 1 Thick 2 Glossy 1 Glossy 2 Letterhead 20 sheets Tray 3 Plain Recycled Single side only Spe Tray 4 cial paper optional 500 sheets Image loss width Printing Leading edge trailing edge right edge left edge 4 2 mm or less Copying Leading edge trailing edge right edge left edge 4 0 mm or less Output capacity 250 sheets Operating temperature 10 to 30 C 50 to 86 F Bes Fluctuations of no more than 10 C 18 F within an hour Operating humidity 15 to 85 Ees Fluctuations of no more
150. b Timeout 0 0 eee Copy Settings Print Settings herren a E Oene AE AE E AA ET EAEE Fax Settings ernn ro rA A NEE aa Maintenance Menu sssseseesessssseseeesssseererssstsrsrsretstsrersseteresssretetntsreretstsrsrereretee Polder Settings ecrccnnenoineireninninni i eeii ie Security Settings 00 0 ee ceeeesecsecseeneeneeeee Changing the administrator password Limitations of the password rules cscceeseseceeesceeceeserseceesesseeeeseceeterseseeeeeaees m m x 8 Contents Passwords regulated by the password rules 0 ccccessesseseeeececeeseeseesecsecseeseeaeeneees 3 74 Conditions of the password rules c cessessessceseesececescensencescensecsecsecsecaeeseeaeeneees 3 75 Enhanced security settings ccecessecseescescesseeeeseeececeeceececaecaeenecaeensensensense 3 75 Required settin 09 ciiccs ccccslesescaseedease sev sovscesedesuutd codes sondessssue concen concen debsencedssveendeesendeess 3 75 Changed SCtiN GS 22 24 area E aee sss A AAE SARNE EE T AERIS 3 76 Rest re D fa lts je rnani ae a Ea a EEE O EENES 3 77 HDD Format iirin rinn itinin iat aria EE EI AE OEA E ERTO 3 77 Papet Empty en ierse aE rod aae er einai 3 78 Restriction Code Settings cccceccececesesseesecsecsecsecseeseeseeseeeeeeeceeceeceeceeteteeeeees 3 78 4 Media Handling cccsscssserssrserssssessesscssssssssssscsessessessessessesseesesseseasseseassessessess
151. be selected by searching for the index characters specified when each destination was registered 1 In the initial Scan to E mail mode screen press wh Za Press the desired index tab to search for destinations If the desired index tab is not displayed press gt or lt until the desired tab appears To select a group destination press and then press Group on the rightmost end 10 14 Specifying destinations 3 Select the destination and then press OK es To specify multiple destinations specify all destinations where the data is to be sent Selecting by searching for a destination type or name Destinations can be selected by searching for their type or name 1 In the initial Scan to E mail mode screen press remi 2 Press Search E 3 Select the method to search for destinations Type Select the destination type Fax E mail etc Name Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for Type in the name to be searched for and then press OK to display a list of the search results 4 Select the destination and then press OK To specify multiple destinations select all destinations where the data is to be sent 5 Press OK Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine directly type in the address 1 In the initial Scan to E mail mode screen press Direct Input 2 Press E mail
152. can data Item Description File Name Type in the document name for the scan data 10 26 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Specifying communication settings The Communication parameters available from the Settings screen can be used to specify settings for sending job completion notifications by E mail URL Notification Description Settings ON OFF Specify whether or not notifications of completion of a job are to be sent by E mail URL Notification Destination Description Specify the E mail address where notifications of completion of a job are to be sent Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations m Selecting from registered destinations on page 10 27 m Directly typing in the address on page 10 29 m Selecting from the log on page 10 32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine Ees In order to select a registered destination address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering destinations on page 10 34 Bz In User Settings Machine Settings Scan to Folder Default Tab you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to Folder mode screen For details refer to M
153. canner unit Rear View 1 Power switch 2 Rear cover 3 Power connection 4 LINE telephone line jack 5 TEL telephone jack 6 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T IEEE 802 3 Ether net interface port 7 USB port Machine Parts About the Control Panel Powerlave _Fhx_ Extjiail Follier Cclpy Rejet J L Aacess n l fee ingens l ri i 8 Mode Memory 4 C5 6 Stop GHI JKL MNO J T PORS TV wz IN TILE 9 Uiilty Coun NZ iter NS me Go Co Sta ce G EWS 38C or Data Error 191817 16 15 14 13 121110 No Name Function 1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages Specify the various settings by directly touch ing the panel 2 Power Save key indicator Press to enter Power Save mode While the machine is in Power Save mode the indicator on the Power Save key lights up in green and the touch panel goes off To cancel Power Save mode press the Power Save key again 3 Fax key indicator Press to enter Fax mode While the machine is in Fax mode the indicator on the Fax key lights up in green 4 E mail key indicator Press to enter Scan to E mail mode While the machine is in Scan to E mail mode the indica tor on the E mail key lights up in green 5 Fold
154. ced Tab PostScript Printer Driver Only sesesessseeessesrsersesesrerseserrereesesee 5 7 My Tab ce sta seess te cheese des ates ste E E EAA E E E AE ledopsdedanteradeigedone 5 8 Basic Tabiiicids aici ae eR a a a a Gd aetna es 5 8 ea yout Tabirini ie E ea tatei sven ste E E aad E E AE 5 9 Cover Mode Tab iniins neien EE s ss 5 9 Stamp Composition Tabe namana e RR E E 5 9 Quality K 1o 5 10 Other Tab sic cccces cesses cevdea eva cseceecuncivcsvesvesvcns nE EA SE A a 5 11 Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print 0 0 5 11 6 Proof Print External memory and ID amp Print functions csccccsseseeseeseseeeee 6 1 Proof Print i5sissiccscecesecscesdeseseose eotesssscsnuesessisscsscescoudsecsuoes zoe nee e odewstoneoagocedsosceascoaseadeceeseoas 6 2 Printing a job saved on the hard disk ccescessesssseesececeecsecaceneeseeeeeeeeeseesceeeteteees 6 2 Deleting a job saved on the hard disk eceececesceseeseeeeseesecaceneeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 6 2 External Memory scsccsssssessessessessesssessssessssssscseeseeseeseeseesessessessesssssssssssensessessessees 6 3 x 10 Contents Printing from a connected USB memory device eeecessesescerseeseeseeseeseeeceeeeeeeeees 6 3 Selecting the type of files to be displayed oo ee ececeseesseesceeceeceseesenseeeecsecseeseeneees 6 4 ID amp Print hi risssssccdssnscdsleccsasenscccsesccedssescsescadaesdccsussdova
155. cel Prints the event log Halftone 64 Settings Print Cancel Cyan 64 Magenta 64 Yellow 64 Black 64 Prints the halftone pattern using a 25 density for each CMYK color Halftone 128 Settings Print Cancel Cyan 128 Magenta 128 Yellow 128 Black 128 Prints the halftone pattern using a 50 density for each CMYK color Admin Settings 3 63 alftone ettings rint ance Halft 256 Setti Print C I Prints the halftone pattern using a 100 den Cyan 256 sity for each CMYK color Magenta 256 Yellow 256 Black 256 Gradation Settings Print Cancel Prints the gradation pattern Activity Report Settings Print Cancel Prints the communications activity report Scan Send Report Print Settings Print Cancel Prints the scanning operations activity report Scan Event Log Settings Print Cancel Prints the scanning event log Printer Adjustment Specify various machine adjustments Leading Edge Adjust ment Adjust the top margin for various types of media Plain Paper Settings 15 to 15 Adjust the top margin of plain paper for simplex single sided printing Thick 1 Settings 15to 15 Adjust the top margin of thick paper for simplex single sided printing Thick 2
156. ches and 14 00 inches Y can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm 1 18 inches and 8 50 inches Documents of mixed page sizes A document containing pages of different sizes Letter and Legal can be loaded into the ADF Each document page will be copied onto paper of the same size as the original the ADF Bes Load all document pages so that they are aligned on the left side of Original Size Paper The size and type of the paper to be printed on can be selected and the size and type settings for the paper loaded into each paper tray can be changed The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document size or it can be specified manually Item Description 1 4 Manually select the paper tray 3 and 4 are available if the optional lower feeder units have been installed Auto The paper is selected automatically according to the size of the original document Change Tray Set Specify the type and size of the paper loaded in the selected paper tray Paper Size Specify the paper size Standard Size Select the paper size Custom Size Enter the size of the paper Paper Type Select the paper type page 4 2 Bey For details on the paper types and sizes refer to Print Media on Bes When paper is loaded in the bypass tray the Paper screen appears while the bypass tray tray 1 is selected automatically
157. chine select Web Service and then check that a destination appears 9 12 Using a Web Service Specifying the scan command from a computer Web Service A computer can send the scan command to this machine then receive the scan data As an example the procedure for scanning from the Windows Photo Gallery is described below Ees The scan command can also be sent from this machine where the data will be saved For details refer to With Web Service Settings on page 10 31 Specifying the scan command from a computer 1 Start up the application used for scanning 2 In the File menu click From Scanner or Camera 3 From the Select Device list select this machine and then click OK The New Scan window appears 4 Position the document on this machine Specify the scan settings and then click Scan Scanning begins and the scan data is added to the list of image files Using a Web Service 9 13 9 14 Using a Web Service Scanning with the machine Initial settings This machine is equipped with scanning functions for saving data on this machine s hard disk or on a USB memory device and with network scanning functions for sending scanned image data through the network with E mail transmissions FTP transmissions SMB transmissions WebDAV transmis sions and Web Service transmissions In order to perform an FTP transmission a connection to the network is required
158. cify that sounds be produced press Enable and then press ON To adjust the volume press Volume and then press Low Medium or High To specify that sounds not be produced press Enable and then press OFF Operation Confirma Select if confirmation sounds are to be produced with tion key operations Input Confirmation Settings Enable ON OFF Soupa Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter data Invalid Input Sound Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when keys are pressed to enter invalid data Basic Sound Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when the default setting is selected while scrolling through the settings 3 4 Accessibility Successful Completion Select if sounds are to be produced when an opera tion or communication is completed successfully Operation Comple tion Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when an opera tion is completed successfully Transmission Com pletion Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when a commu nication is completed successfully Comple
159. continuous 9 000 pages full color continuous Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 Transfer roller 100 000 pages Transfer belt unit 100 000 pages continuous Fuser unit 100 000 pages continuous Bz y The values shown above indicate the number of pages for simplex printing using A4 Letter size media with 5 coverage The actual life may differ be shorter depending on the printing condi tions coverage paper size etc differences in the printing method such as continuous printing or intermittent printing when print jobs of one page are often printed or the type of paper used for example thick paper In addition the life will be affected by the temperature and humidity of the operating environment Whether printing in color or black and white color printers consume a small amount of each toner during the initialization operation when the machine is turned on or off and during automatic adjustments to main tain print quality Even if an operating error occurred during black and white printing color toner is consumed and may need to be replaced Technical specifications Service Replaceable Item Average Life Expectancy Media feed roller 300 000 pages Technical specifications Text input The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below Entering text In the keyboard screen press the character that you want
160. cope Web Connection For details of the settings on the E mail RX POP page refer to the Reference Guide This machine connects to the POP server at a fixed interval to check if an Internet fax has arrived If an Internet fax has been received the attached file will automatically be printed Bes If data is received with a resolution not supported by this machine a reception error occurs For the resolution of data that can be received by this machine refer to Technical specifications on page A 2 The subject and body text of received Internet faxes are not printed If the memory reception or PC fax reception function is being used the data for a received Internet fax is saved in the memory For details on using data saved in the memory refer to Memory reception G3 fax Internet fax on page 4 7 or Receiving a PC fax on page 5 18 Bes Settings can be specified for printing a reception error report when reception of an Internet fax fails For details on the report refer to Printing reports ists on page 7 4 Receiving Internet faxes 4 5 Useful reception functions The various useful reception functions available with this machine are described below Polling reception G3 fax Polling reception is the function where a document queued for polling trans mission by the sender or a document saved on the sender s bulletin board is sent with a command from the recipient This is useful when
161. country code at the beginning of the fax number ECM Select this check box to use ECM error correction mode If the V 34 Mode check box is selected this check box cannot be cleared V 34 Mode Select this check box to use the super G3 fax transmis sion mode Select this check box for ordinary operation clear this check box only when communication is not possible due to the mode of the recipient s machine 4 To add the recipient to groups select the check boxes for the groups When a recipient is added to a group a fax can be sent to the recipi ent by selecting the group as the destination broadcast transmission If faxes will frequently be sent to certain destinations it is useful to add them to a group The recipient can be added to multiple groups Using the phone book 5 15 5 Click 0K The personal information is registered and displayed under Personal List If groups have been selected for the recipient the recipient will appear in the list for those groups 6 Click 0K If recipients have already been added to the phone book editing of the phone book is finished If this is the first time that a recipient is being added to the phone book a dialog box appears requesting confirmation to save the phone book T Click Yes The Save As dialog box appears Browse to the folder where the file is to be saved type in the file name and then click Save The phone book is saved as a new file
162. ct the job from the list and then press Details Reception jobs Press Receive to view the log for reception jobs To view job details select the job from the list and then press Details Bes To view an address select the job from the job log and then press Details If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Hide Personal Data is set to ON the address is displayed as Checking a job 7 3 Printing reports lists This section describes the fax related reports and lists that can be printed by this machine Types of reports The following types of fax related reports can be printed by this machine Report name Description Activity Report This report provides a record of transmissions and receptions Results can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions receptions Transmission results and reception results are printed separately If necessary the conditions for printing can be specified TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results A reduced image of the sent document is printed on the first page This report is automatically printed when a fax is sent If necessary the conditions for printing can be specified Reservation TX Report G3 fax only This report provides a detailed record of timer transmissions This report is automatically printed when a timer transmission is queued If necessary the machine can
163. cument to be sent Paper Size Select the size of the paper to be sent If it is differ ent from the original document size the output image will be automatically enlarged or reduced Zoom Select an enlargement or reduction ratio Authentication Account Track Click this button to specify the user name and password when User Authentication has been enabled on this machine or the account name and password when Account Track has been enabled on this machine Be To fax an original document of a custom size select Custom Size from the Original Size list In the Custom Size Settings dialog box specify the length and width of the original document Be If user authentication is not enabled in the Configure tab user authentication will not be performed If user authentication is being used be sure to enable it in the Device Option list For details refer to Configure tab on page 5 13 Fax driver settings 5 11 Authentication Account Track dialog box Item Description User Authentication If user authentication settings have been specified on this machine select Recipient User and then specify in the User Name and Password boxes the settings specified on the machine up to 64 characters If public user access is allowed on this machine the printer can be used when Public User is selected Server settings must be specified if user authenti c
164. d However if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on account track will not be performed For details refer to the Reference Guide User authentication and account track 1 11 With account track 1 Specify an account and password for Account and Password Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used 1 12 User authentication and account track Initial settings After installation settings must be specified for the following in order to use the fax functions Be sure to specify these settings correctly otherwise fax transmissions cannot be performed G3 fax settings Date amp Time Settings Specify the current date and time For details on the settings refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide Fax Target Select the country where this machine is installed For details on the settings refer to Fax Target on page 2 20 Sender Settings Specify the name and fax number of the sender this machine For details on the settings refer to Sender Settings on page 2 8 Comm Settings Specify settings for the fax operating environment such as the dialing method and reception mode For details on the settings refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 Initial settings 1 13 Internet fax settings Bes Settings for using
165. d after information has been entered in the FAX Number box of the FAX Transmission Popup dialog box Fax driver settings 5 13 Saving fax driver settings The settings specified in the Printing Preferences dialog box of the fax driver can be saved as favorite settings Saved settings can be recalled at any time by selecting them from the Favor ite Setting list in the Printing Preferences dialog box Saving the settings After changing the fax driver settings click Add in the Favorite Setting box Then specify settings for the following Item Description Name Enter a name for the settings up to 30 characters Icon Select an icon Settings can be saved without an icon selected Sharing Select this check box to share the setting file with other users or clear this check box to register it for private use Only the administrator can select the Sharing check box Comment Enter a detailed description of the setting file if necessary up to 255 characters Be Up to 30 shared driver settings and up to 20 private driver settings can be saved Editing settings To edit saved favorite settings click Edit in the Favorite Setting box Select the name of the favorite settings to be edited and then edit the settings Ees To select the items to be recalled when favorite settings are selected click Option Selected settings are applied to the current settings
166. d from the log of the last five transmissions 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Log 2 Select the destination from the list and then press the Start key Be Only one destination can be selected from the log Bey The only destinations that appear in the log are those specified after pressing Direct Input In addition destinations specified with broadcast transmissions do not appear in the log Selecting a program destination Data can be sent with a program destination previously registered on the machine Program destinations are registered with destinations where data is fre quently sent together with scan settings allowing data to easily be sent with out the trouble of specifying the various settings Bes In order to select a program destination the program destination must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering a program destination on page 10 36 Press Scan to Folder to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen 2 Position the document to be scanned For details on loading the original document refer to Loading a Docu ment on page 4 36 3 Press the Mode Memory key 4 Select the desired program destination from the list and then press OK The settings and destination addresses are recalled Bes Only one program destination can be selected 10 32 Specifying destinations 5 Press the Start key Press the Start Color
167. de on the Documentation CD DVD 1 8 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Printer Drivers PPD Files Operating System Use Benefit Mac OS X 10 2 8 10 3 9 10 4 10 5 These files are required in order to 10 6 use the printer driver for each operat ing system Mac OS X Server 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 For details of the Macintosh and Linux printer driver refer to the Ref erence Guide on the Documentation SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 CD DVD Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Desktop Scanner Drivers Operating System Use Benefit TWAIN Driver for Windows 7 Vista These drivers enable you to set scan Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 ning functions such as the color set TWAIN Driver for Mac OS X 10 3 9 ing and size adjustments 10 4 10 5 10 6 For details refer to Windows WIA Driver Settings on page 9 7 WIA Driver for Windows 7 Vista This driver enables you to set scan Server 2008 XP ning functions such as the color set WIA Driver for Windows 7 Vista ting and size adjustments Server 2008 XP for 64bit For details refer to Windows WIA Driver Settings on page 9 7 PC Fax Drivers Operating System Use Benefit Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 XP These drivers enable you to specify Server 2003 2000 fax settings such as the paper set tings for sending faxes and the set tings for editing the address book For detai
168. details on specifying density settings refer to Density on page 7 8 For details on specifying document type settings refer to Original Basic copy operation Type on page 7 9 For details on specifying color settings refer to Color Mode on page 7 9 For details on specifying Finishing settings refer to Finishing on page 7 10 For details on performing the Proof Copy operation refer to Proof Copy on page 7 10 For details on performing the Separate Scan operation refer to Sep arate Scan on page 7 11 For details on performing the ID Copy operation refer to ID Copy on page 7 13 For details on specifying a binding margin refer to Paper Margin on page 7 14 For details on adjusting the image quality refer to lmage Quality on page 7 15 4 Using the keypad type in the desired number of copies Bey If the number of copies was incorrectly entered press the C key and then type in the correct number of copies 5 To make a color copy press the Start Color key To make a black and white copy press the Start B amp W key Ng This machine cannot automatically detect the size of an original docu ment that will be scanned Before scanning the document specify its size If the size of the original document is not correctly specified some parts of the image may be lost For details on specifying the size of an original document refer to
169. dge indicated to the left The replacement procedure for the imaging unit is the same for all colors yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K The following instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge K 11 12 Replacing Consumables 4 Grab the handle of the toner car tridge to be removed and then pull out the cartridge Bey Do not tilt removed toner car tridge otherwise toner may Spill 5 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it 6 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle and then slowly pull out the bottle Ees Do not tilt removed waste toner box otherwise waste toner may spill Replacing Consumables 11 13 T While pressing down the area marked Push on the imaging unit to be replaced slide the unit completely out of the machine The following instructions show the procedure to replace the imaging unit K Note Dispose of the used imaging unit according to your local regulations Do not burn the imaging unit 8 Check the color of the new imaging unit to be installed Bey In order to prevent toner from spilling leave the imaging unit in the bag until step 7 is being performed 9 Remove the imaging unit from the bag 11 14 Replacing Consumables 10 Hold the imaging unit with both hands and then shake it twice as shown in the illustration
170. dia Feed Rollers for Tray 2 3 4 1 Pull out the tray gt To wn oo 2s fe DO on Oo SS HE EE 5 pa Sn s Cc a o oo D oao5 fe OFS O 12 7 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3 4 1 Open the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 Bes Before opening the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 fold up Tray 1 2 Clean the media transfer rollers by wiping them with a soft dry 4 cloth gt 0 3 Close the right side cover of Tray 3 or Tray 4 12 8 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF 1 Open the ADF feed cover 2 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft dry cloth 3 Close the ADF feed cover Cleaning the machine 12 9 Cleaning the Laser Lens This machine is constructed with four laser lenses Clean all lenses as described below The laser lens cleaning tool should be attached to the inside of the tray 2 1 Pull out the tray 2 2 Remove the cover A Ees Since the cover will be used A later do not return it to its original position 3 Remove the cleaning tool from the tray 2 E O 12 10 Cleaning the machine 4 Close the tray 2 5 Open the machine s front cover 6 Remove the waste toner bottle and the toner cartridge and imaging unit for the color of laser lens to be cleaned Bes For details on removin
171. double sided printing Plain Paper Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of plain paper Thick 1 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of Thick 1 paper Thick 2 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of Thick 2 paper Postcard Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of postcards 3 66 Admin Settings Envelope Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of envelopes Label Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of labels Glossy 1 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of Glossy 1 media Glossy 2 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex double sided printing of Glossy 2 media Thick Paper Image Density Adjust the density of images printed on thick paper Cyan Settings 5 to 5 Default 0 Finely adjust the density of cyan for images printed on thick paper Magenta Settings 5 to 5 Default 0 Finely adjust the density of ma
172. e Disable Specify access blocking for IP address filtering 3 46 Admin Settings IPv6 Specify IPv6 settings Enable Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to enable IPv6 Auto Setting Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable the IPv6 auto setting Link Local Displays the link local address Global Address Displays the global address Gateway Address Displays the gateway address Netware Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable NetWare AppleTalk Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable AppleTalk Network Speed Settings Auto 10 Mbps Full Duplex 10 Mbps Half Duplex 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100 Mbps Half Duplex 1 Gbps Full Duplex Specifies the transmission speed for the net work and the transmission method for bidirec tional transmission IEEE802 1X Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable IEEE802 1X Binary Division Settings ON OFF Select whether or not transmission data is divided S MIME Comm Setting Specify S MIME communication settings S MIME Enabled Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable S MIME Digital Signature Settings Always add signature Do not add signature Select when sending
173. e that recipient is deleted from all groups it belongs to Bey Names and fax numbers that have been added using Register To Phone Book when sending faxes appear in the Simple Entry folder of the phone book Changing group membership Select the name of the recipient to be edited under Personal List on the left side of the phone book and then select or clear the check boxes in the group list on the right Up to 100 recipients can be added to a single group Changing a group name Select the group name to be changed under Group on the left side of the phone book click the Edit menu and then click Rename Group Creating a folder Select Personal List on the left side of the phone book and then click Add Folder to create a folder A folder can also be created by clicking Add Folder in the Edit menu A recipient can be moved from the Personal List to the new folder by drag ging the name to the folder To edit a folder select the folder to be changed and then click Edit To delete a folder select the folder to be deleted and then click Delete Searching for personal information Clicking Find on the right side of the phone book displays the Find dialog box where various search conditions can be specified Using the phone book 5 17 Receiving a PC fax When this machine receives a PC fax the received document is saved in the machine s memory in the TIFF format Documents saved in
174. e Toner Bottle When the waste toner bottle becomes full the message Waste Toner Box Full appears in the message window The machine stops and will not start again until the waste toner bottle is replaced Open the machine s front cover 2 Pull up the waste toner bottle to unlock it Replacing Consumables 11 19 3 Grab the left and right handles of the waste toner bottle and then slowly pull out the bottle Ees Do not tilt removed waste toner box otherwise waste toner may spill 4 Remove the new waste toner bottle from its packaging Insert the used waste toner bottle into the plastic bag included in the box and then box it up Note Dispose of the used waste toner bottle according to your local regulations Do not burn the waste toner bottle 5 Press in on the waste toner bot tle until it locks into place 11 20 Replacing Consumables 6 Close the front cover Bes When closing the front cover press the area of the cover with small pro jections Ees If the waste toner bottle is not fully inserted the front cover cannot be closed Replacing Consumables 11 21 Replacing the Transfer Roller When the time to replace the transfer roller is reached the message Replace transfer roller unit appears Printing can continue even after this message appears however since the print quality is reduced the transfer roller should be replaced immediately 1 Pull the lever and
175. e destina tions were correctly reg istered The telephone line may be incorrectly con nected Check the telephone line connection If it is dis connected connect it There may be a problem with the recipient s fax machine such as no paper or turned off Contact the recipient An incorrect telephone line setting may have been selected Check that the dialing method setting selected from the Comm Set tings screen matches the telephone line being used An incorrect password may have been speci fied when the transmis sion was sent with Password TX set to Yes Check the password at the receiving end and then try sending the fax again with the correct password An incorrect password may have been speci fied when the transmis sion was sent with F Code TX set to Yes Check the password at the receiving end and then try sending the fax again with the correct password The recipient s fax num ber may have been incorrectly specified on their fax machine when the transmission was sent with TX Confirm CSI set to Yes Have the recipient check that their fax number is correctly specified on their machine Problems when sending faxes 8 3 Internet fax Symptom Cause Solution Transmission is not pos sible The network settings are not specified correctly Check that the settings in Initial settings on p
176. e destination Registering an address book destination Item Description Line Settings Configure the line used to send faxes ECM OFF The error correction mode ECM is turned off to shorten the transmission time ECM is an error correction mode defined by ITU T Inter national Telecommunication Union Telecom munication Standardization Sector Fax machines equipped with the ECM feature communicate with each other while confirming that the data sent is free of errors V34 OFF V 34 is a communication mode used with super G3 fax communication When the remote machine or this machine is connected to a telephone line through a PBX it may not be possible to establish communication in super G3 mode due to the condition of the telephone line In this case it is recommended that V 34 be turned off before sending data After the transmission has been completed this machine automatically turns on the V 34 mode Check Dest amp Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number CSI and the data is sent only if those fax numbers match If they do not match the communication will fail resulting in a transmission error To verify the destination and send the fax the recipient s fax number must be specified on their fax machine Internet fax Internet fax destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection For details on r
177. e fusing section has reached room temperature otherwise you may get burnt 2 Pull the lever and then open the right door Bes Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 3 Open the fuser unit cover Replacing Consumables 11 35 4 Pull down the 2 levers 5 Remove the fuser unit 6 Prepare a new fuser unit Ees Be careful not to touch the surface of the fuser roller 11 36 Replacing Consumables T Lift up the 2 levers 8 Remove the packing material 9 Push down the 2 levers Replacing Consumables 11 37 1 0 Pull down the 2 levers of a new fuser unit 1 1 Insert the fuser unit until it locks into place 1 2 Lift up the 2 levers 11 38 Replacing Consumables 1 3 Close the fuser unit cover 1 4 Close the right door Ees If the door cannot be closed check that the fuser unit is fully inserted 1 5 Reset the counter in the Admin Settings Maintenance Menu Supplies Consumables Replace Fusing Unit menu Replacing Consumables 11 39 Antistatic Protection Note It s very important to protect the printer controller board from electrostatic damage while performing any task involving the controller board Turn off all power switches first If an antistatic wrist strap is provided in your printer option kit attach one end of it to your wrist and the other end to the bare metal chassis on the back of your printer Never a
178. e length of time until the machine enters Power Save mode Date amp Time Settings Specify the date time and time zone Date XX XX XX Specify the current date Bey The default setting is set in the order month day then year MM DD YY for 120V model month then year DD MM YY for 220V model Europe and year month then day YY MM DD for 220V model Asia and China ime pecify the current time Ti Specify th tti ime Zone ettings 12 00 to 13 efault 00 Time Z Setti 12 00 to 13 00 Default 00 00 The time zone can be set between 12 00 and 13 00 in 30 minute increments The time dif ference for Japan is 9 00 Admin Settings 3 41 Daylight Saving Time Specify settings for daylight saving time Enable Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the machine s internal clock observes daylight saving time If ON is selected the specified time offset from the current time appears Offset Settings 1 to 150 Default 60 Specify the length of time applied for daylight saving time between 1 and 150 minutes in 1 minute increments Li st Counter The machine settings can be printed Job Settings List Settings Print Cancel Prints the list of machine settings Report Input Tray Settings Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Select the paper tray loaded with the pap
179. e lute teutesduetedss eu cdensureionesens 3 9 Selecting from the LOG sec ccerecesacsdaeeecvausvetestescenfoatendreteueat tetiveeteaateceaniet a cnet 3 9 x 4 Contents Selecting with an LDAP search cc ccccessesseseesseseeeseeeceeceeceececeeceaeeseeseeaeeaeeasenee 3 10 Specifying scam settings csssssssssscsessessessesssecssessesseseeseesecsessessessesssessessssssseeesee 3 11 LOriginaliby pel BAA ENE E E bse ata EE E AERO E DI ca da Resolution ennaint iiia aeaiia NE e i Separate Scan Procedure Density eee Backeround Removal nennen opd edirki iiia 3 12 SHArpriess hierin TE E E A EO AA E E ay 3 12 Specifying communication settings G3 fax e ssseessseeesesesoesesosseoesesceesesecoesesosecoeseeeee 3 13 ECM OFF Jeni aa an ER EEEE EN EE O E AE E E 3 13 VBA OFE isehh ea ande a a E ates 3 13 Check Dest amp Send erescniessnioniiiiiiiniinsnsnnii niaii 3 13 Useful transmission functions G3 fax seseessesseseeseeseesoecoesossessesoesoesooseessesoesoeeoeseeseee 3 14 Parr TX oes kes ccece e aT E aae E E GE AAA davis seadecseveecuscabeateetes 3 14 PASS WOT TX EEE EE AA 3 15 ECod TX rni n A O Deveeedeietere aes 3 15 Specifying e mail Internet fax settings e e seseseseseeseseesesesoeeesoseeeosesossesesoesesoseeoeseeeee 3 17 Specifying document settings s000 3 18 Original Size been aie ila alae leek See ah ain as 3 18 Long Ofieinal isinna eit tea a a a aa eare E de
180. e printer driver if necessary Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 1 Close all applications 2 Choose the Uninstall Program as follows Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 From the Start menu choose All programs KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 and then Uninstall Printer Driver Windows 2000 From the Start menu choose Programs KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 and then Uninstall Printer Driver When the Uninstall dialog box appears select the name of the driver to be deleted and then click the Uninstall button Click Uninstall Click OK and restart your computer Oak Ww The printer driver will be uninstalled from your computer 5 4 Uninstalling the Printer Driver for Windows Displaying Printer Driver Settings for Windows Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 1 From the Start menu choose Devices and Printers to display the Devices and Printers directory 2 Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon and then click Printing Preferences Windows Vista Server 2008 1 From the Start menu click Control Panel then Hardware and Sound and then click Printers to open the Printers directory 2 Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon and then click Printing Preferences
181. ears when this unit is receiving data or documents Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied E a a k E Appears when a USB memory device is connected Touch panel User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track setting have been specified es User authentication and account track settings are specified from Pag eScope Web Connection For details refer to the Reference Guide With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list 2 Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list 2 Specify a server for Server Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used Bey If account track settings have been applied account track will be per formed after Login is presse
182. eceececesecsecsecsecaeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaees Performing a polling reception Memory reception G3 fax Internet fax Using received documents ecscecessssssceessesseseseceecseeeesesevsesaesesscaeseeecseseeeeens Contents x 5 Closed network reception G3 fax cececeesessesceecesceseeseesecsecseeseeseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeetaees 4 7 Fax forwarding G3 fax Internet fax eceeeeeeceeceeceseeseesecseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteees 4 8 E mail forwarding G3 fax Internet fax 00 eececceeceseeseesecscenceseeseeseeeseeseteeeseteees 4 8 Remote reception G3 fax ceecesssssscesceecesceseeseseaecsecseeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesceseeseeeees 4 9 Giving the reception command from an external telephone eee 4 9 Night reception G3 fax Internet fax ccc ecesseesesceeeceeceeceeceaeeaecaecsecaecaeeseeeeeseees 4 10 Printing received fAaxeS ccrecrecrecsessesssssesrsesesersessscssesseeseeseesesseessessessesseseess 4 11 Determining the paper Sizes diuch enni n ni S 4 11 Step 1 Determining the most suitable paper size s sessessssessssseesersessesesseees 4 11 Step 2 Determining the actual paper size used for printing e eee 4 12 Reducing and splitting ee eeceseeeseeeceeceeceeceseeseeseeeeceecaecaecaseaaeaaeaaecsecaeeseeseeneees 4 12 When Tray Selection for RX Print is set to a specific drawer eee 4 12 When Min Reduction for RX Print is set to 1L00 Jo cece seceeer
183. ecessary specify settings for Start Number and Number of Addresses to limit the number of destinations to be printed With Start Number specify the registration number for the first desti nation to be printed With Number of Addresses specify the number of destinations to be printed The specified number of destinations starting from the regis tration number specified with Start Number will be printed 9 Press List Output 1 0 Press Print and then press OK The destination list is printed Fax Setup Information list This list contains the fax related settings that have been specified For details on printing the settings list refer to List Print on page 2 19 7 12 Printing reports lists Troubleshooting Problems when sending faxes Bes For details on the error messages refer to Error messages on page 8 9 For details on troubleshooting procedures for document misfeeds paper misfeeds poor print quality or empty toner refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide If the fax cannot be sent correctly refer to the following table and then per form the indicated operation If the fax still cannot be sent correctly even after performing the described operations contact your technical representative G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The document is not scanned The document is too thick too thin or too small Use the original glass to s
184. echnical representative Error message Cause Solution Off Hook The machine has been left off hook after a man ual transmission Put the machine back on hook Memory Full Fax The memory is full If a fax is being sent send the scanned docu ment pages Otherwise send the fax manually If a fax is being received print the received docu ments saved in the memory Fax TX Failed An error occurred while a G3 fax is being sent This error is automati cally cleared Fax RX Failed An error occurred while a G3 fax is being received This error is automati cally cleared PC Fax TX Error An error occurred while receiving PC Fax TX data This error is automati cally cleared Polling RX Error Multiple destinations were specified for polling reception Multiple destinations cannot be specified for polling reception Try performing the opera tion again with only one destination specified PC Fax Restricted A PC fax transmission was requested although PC fax transmissions are prohibited For details on specifying PC fax transmission set tings refer to Fax Function Settings on page 2 13 I Fax TX failed An error occurred while an Internet fax is being sent This error is automati cally cleared Error messages 8 9 Error message Cause Solution I Fax RX failed An e
185. ecsscssescessessecssessessessessesseseeseesesseess Image Quality EAE A S E S ISE INOIT 8 Additional copy operations e sssesesseesseseseesesosseecseseesesesoseesosecoesesosseoesoeeesesesoesesoseeoeseeees 8 1 Interrupting a copy job ccccssererserserserssssscsssssssesssssseesesseesessessesseesessessessensers 8 2 COPY programs ccccsssssserseccscvsessesersessersessessessscsecssesessssessessessessessesseseeseeseesenseeseess 8 3 Storing a COPY program 00 eeecceseecesseseeeeceeceeceeceseesceseeaecaeceecseceeceaessesaesaecsecseeseeneens 8 3 Deleting a COPY program eceeeesessessceececeeceseesecsecsecaeescessesseseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeetaees 8 3 Copying using stored settings copy programs eeesessesseeeeeseeeeeeceeceseeeeteeeeeeees 8 4 9 Scanning From a Computer Application cscscsssssssssssessessesssssssssesensessessessees 9 1 Basic Scanning Operation sccscsersessessessccssesssssessssssssssessssessesseseeseessessesesseess 9 2 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings e sessesesssseseseseesesesoesesonseeesesosseoesoecesesesoesesoseeoeseeeee 9 3 Mode settings onen A Uinta stele A 9 3 When Basic Mode is selected nyeneni 9 3 When Advanced Mode is selected ee ececsesceecsseeceseseeceeterseseeeesesersesseeeeaee 9 4 Windows WIA Driver Settings 9 7 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings sssssessessesssscssssssessesseesessssssssessssssseessers 9 8 Mode Settings i aaide ina a e Ne Aa ES EE 9 8
186. ect the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also Paper on page 7 5 Loading Media 4 29 About Duplex Printing Duplex double sided printing can be done with this printer which has the duplex unit built in as a standard If the paper has low opacity high translu cency then the printed data from one side of the page will show through to the other side Check your application for margin information For best results print a small quantity to make sure the opacity is acceptable Note Only plain paper special paper and thick stock 60 210 g m can be autoduplexed See Specifications on page 4 2 Duplexing envelopes labels letterheads postcards glossy media or single side only papers is not supported How do I autoduplex Check your application to determine how to set your margins for duplex double sided printing The following Binding Position settings are available If Long Edge Left is selected the pages will be laid out to flip at the left 3 If Long Edge Right is selected the pages will be laid out to flip at the right 3 If Short Edge Top is selected the pages will be laid out to flip at the top 3 4 30 About Duplex Printing If Long Edge Bottom is selected the pages will be laid out to flip at the bottom In addition if Booklet is selected autoduplex printing is performed The following Order setti
187. ed Original Size Specify the size of the document that is to be sent Item Description Standard Size Select the size of the document Select Letter Legal to scan a document con taining different page sizes Custom Size Specify the size of the document if itis a non standard size Press X and Y and then type in the document size X can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm 1 18 inches and 14 00 inches Y can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm 1 18 inches and 8 50 inches 10 20 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Original Settings Separate Scan A document can be divided and scanned separately The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for example when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document Yes a A ON Press the Start key The document is scanned Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass Press Scan to Folder to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen With Original Settings in the Settings screen set Separate Scan to Place the next document page on the original glass and then press the Start key Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned 6 After all pages of the document have been scanned press Finish
188. ed replace it residual incorrectly images Printer There are The media transfer Clean the media transfer roller toner roller is dirty If you think the transfer roller should be smudges on replaced contact Technical Support the back side with the error information of the page e media path is rint several blank sheets and the whether or Th di th i Print blank sheets and th not it has dirty with toner excess toner should disappear been One or more ofthe Remove the toner cartridges and duplexed toner cartridges are check for damage If it is damaged replace it One or more of the imaging units is defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it Abnormal areas white black or color appear in a regular pattern The laser lens is dirty Clean the laser lens A toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridges with the color causing the abnormal image Replace it with a new toner cartridge One or more of the imaging units is defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it Solving Problems with Printing Quality 13 35 Symptom Cause Solution Image The laser lens is dirty Clean the laser lens defects Fointer A toner cartridge may be leaking Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it A to
189. ed for scanning 3 Start the scanner driver according to the application settings 4 Specify the necessary scanner driver settings 5 Click the Scan button in the scanner driver Basic Scanning Operation Windows TWAIN Driver Settings Mode settings m Mode Settings Select Basic Mode for specifying basic settings or select Advanced Mode for specifying detailed settings The settings that can be specified differ for each mode When Basic Mode is selected The following parameters can be set when Basic Mode is selected Help icon Click to display Help information m About icon Click to display the software version information m Scan Objective Specify the document type m Scan Type Specify the scan type m Resolution Specify the resolution m Auto Color Adjustment Specify the auto color adjustment settings m Auto Deskew Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image m Paper source Specify the paper source When scanning documents from the ADF select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document m Original Size Specify the original size m Rotation Select the orientation of the image to be scanned Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9 3 Bes If the Rotate back side check box is selected the back side of the image is rotated 180 and scanned Applies only if ADF 2 sided is selected E Image size Shows the data size of
190. ed to the simulation profile Absolute Color Absolute color is applied to the simulation profile CMYK Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced using the four CMYK colors Bk CMYK Gray CMYKkKy Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using only black Admin Settings 3 59 Gradation Adjustment Specify settings for gradation level adjust ments Tone Calibration Settings ON OFF ON Image adjustments are applied OFF Image adjustments are not applied AIDC Process Settings Execute Cancel Execute Image adjustments are performed immediately Cancel Image adjustments are not per formed Bes AIDC processing consumes toner CMYK Density Specify fine adjustment settings for cyan magenta yellow and black Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Settings 3 to 3 Default 0 Highlight The density of the highlight color in images can be adjusted Middle The density of the middle color in images can be adjusted Shadow The density of the shadow color in images can be adjusted Color Separation Settings ON OFF ON Color separation is performed The con tents o
191. eds 3 18 Simplex Duplex pe e iaaii EEE E E E cos E LE 3 18 Binding Position serne nee E eons a IS EENEI EE sa 3 19 Sending to multiple destinations broadcast transmissions cscessccsereseees 3 20 Selecting a program destination esesesseseseesesesoeeesosecoesesosseeeseseesesesoesesoseeoesecesseeesseeee 3 21 Faxing manually G3 fax esesesessesesessesesoseesesesoeecsosseeesesesseses 3 22 If the fax cannot be sent automatic redialing G3 fax 3 23 Canceling a queued transmission cccssessesesesseeseereees 3 23 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification 3 24 C53 LAK E E aU sea E lat lo E E E E T seageesetducusvoncvecotecseebes 3 24 Tintern et faxr anrae rotae E E EEA E ETE 3 24 4 Receiving faxes csccsccsecsececsecseesessessessesssessessessssscsssssssscsscsseeseeseeseesecssesseseeseess Receiving G3 faxes cssscsscssscresrssssrsersersesessscssssecssssssssessesseessessessessessessesseseaseeseese Automatic reception cfs fateh a EEE AEE ail alee Manual receptiOti ssnin nenion ear s With the control panel With an external telephone DRPD ro e ERR E Ring Pattern heres eee eA AE Ea Aa aa arai Receiving Internet faxes e esseeeseeecoesesosseeesecosseeosoeeesesessesesoeceseseeoesesoseeeeseeeeseeesoeeeseeesoe Useful reception functions sssscsersssssssecsscsssssescsssssssssessessessessesseseeseeseeseesesseess Polling reception G3 fax ecccecscececeseeseeeece
192. eee 1 4 Tray 1 Manual feed tray 1 4 Tray Zerr AAAI 1 4 Tray 3 ses ses s85 cesses sdvessscsessstsebsedsoissssoieses 1 4 Tray ois cas ss casas coeesessecsarsetssutetesstesseseese 1 4 Troubleshooting ee 13 1 Media Misfeeds 0 0 cece 13 23 Status error and service messages 13 38 TWAIN Driver c002 9 3 9 8 Index A 13 U USB HOST port oo ee 1 4 USB Pori sicscscsceesspsdsvans dos seiveddecessansenses 1 4 User authentication 0 00 00 2 15 Device authentication 06 2 15 External server authentication 2 15 User Setting 0 cece e 3 10 Using authentication device IC card type I AEE A EAN 15 2 Utility Setting 0 000 eee 3 1 W Waste toner bottle ee 1 4 When Card Authentication Password is enabled cc eee 15 7 When Card Authentication is enabled 15 7 WIA Driver cccccccscetseeseeseeees 9 7 Working Table 1 4 14 6 A 14 Index The essentials of imaging KONICA MINOLTA bizhub c35 Users Guide Fax Thank You Thank you for purchasing a bizhub C35 You have made an excellent choice This User s Guide describes operating procedures and precautions for the use of the Fax functions Be sure to read this User s Guide before starting any machine operations In order to ensure correct use of the Fax functions read this User s Guide
193. eeeeeeee 4 13 When Print Separate Fax Pages is set to OFF cecceccescescesseseeseeneeeenee 4 13 When Print Separate Fax Pages is set to ON eceeescescesseseesceeeensenseeenee 4 13 Adding reception information sscssccscsscsscsecessssssssesssssssessessessessssseesenssesensees 4 14 5 Sending receiving a PC fax ccccssserserserserscssscsseesesssessessessessessessessseessessessessensers 5 1 Sending a PC fax scssssscssessessesssssssscesssseseseseeseeseseeseeseeseesssssssscssessessessesenseeseeseese 5 2 Transmission Operation niaiso irai nE EE E E EEE 5 2 Selecting a recipient from the phone book sessesssessessrserresssesrssersrsrerersesrrrersreseeese 5 3 Selecting a recipient from the address booK s sssssessseseesesssessssesseserssesessrsesesessese 5 4 Specifying transmission conditions sessssseseessesessesssesstsesterestsessteesserstseressesessene 5 4 Creating a fax cover sheet cceeeeeee R ER A E E stants 5 5 FAX Cover Sheet Settings dialog bOX sssssseesessssesseseerersesererrerrrerererrererees 5 5 Basic taboos dacs aedscstesaocsossscsseshvuveetecseerted oosdes cud desdosdesdesdeidestnudsvivetsecte 5 6 Recipient tab c cece cecscssccseceecsecesessesessecsecsecseeseeseesceseesesseeseeseceececeeceeceaeease 5 6 Sender tab meronis einean i o A SEE E AA EERE a 5 7 mapel tabio retra atii e aA A EEEE NAE E A 5 7 Fax river Settings
194. eeeeeeeeereeeteeeee 1 6 Troubleshooting 0 ee 8 1 Error messages ooo eee eee eeeeeeeee 8 9 U User authentication 0 0 0 0 1 11 Device authentication 1 11 External server authentication 20 0 cece 1 11 Index A 7 A 8 Index
195. een 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass For details on loading the original document refer to Loading a Docu ment on page 4 36 If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF set Settings Original Settings Separate Scan to ON so that the document can be divided and scanned separately For details refer to Original Settings Separate Scan on page 10 5 To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data set Settings Original Settings Sep arate Scan to ON For details on Separate Scan refer to Original Settings Separate Scan on page 10 5 3 Specify the destination For details on specifying destinations refer to Specifying destina tions on page 10 14 In the initial Scan to E mail mode screen press Mode Check to check or change the specified destinations 4 If necessary specify settings for other parameters in the Settings screen For details on the Simplex Duplex Original Size Original Settings Color Mode and Original Type parameters available from the Set tings screen refer to Specifying document settings on page 10 4 For details on the Background Density Resolution and File Set tings parameters available from the Settings screen refer to Speci fying scan settings on page 10 8 For details on the Communication
196. eet of labels consists of a face sheet the printing surface adhesive and a carrier sheet m The face sheet must follow the plain paper specification m The face sheet surface must cover the entire carrier sheet and no adhe sive should come through on the surface You can print continuously with label sheets However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Check your application documentation for more information on printing labels Capacity Tray 1 2 Up to 20 sheets depending on their thick ness Tray 3 4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Label Media Type Duplexing Not supported Use label sheets that are m Recommended for laser printing DO NOT use label sheets that m Have labels that easily peel off or have parts of the label already removed m Have backing sheets that have peeled away or have exposed adhesive Bes Labels may stick to the fuser causing them to peel off and media misfeeds to occur Print Media 4 7 m Are precut or perforated Do not use OK to use Shiny backed paper Full page labels uncut Letterhead You can print continuously with letterhead However this could a
197. egistering from PageScope Web Connection refer to the Ref erence Guide E If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict a destination cannot be regis tered from the user mode of PageScope Web Connection Registering an address book destination 6 5 Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for fax transmission is described below Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine Bes For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection refer to the Reference Guide 1 Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen 2 Press Settings and then select the appropriate settings on the Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens For details on the Scan Settings screen refer to Specifying scan settings on page 3 11 For details on the Comm Settings screen refer to Specifying com munication settings G3 fax on page 3 13 Useful transmission func tions G3 fax on page 3 14 and Specifying e mail Internet fax settings on page 3 17 For details on the Original Settings screen refer to Specifying docu ment settings on page 3 18 Press the Mode Memory key
198. eie nn naiai EE EEE 11 35 Contents x 13 12 13 14 Antistatie Protection scisscdecesstessdeecsesescencslsccdceseedenscbsbeesesteteces concsedeoceosaesedgesoessesseses 11 40 Maintenance ssesccscsescescascsscaecescestscsccoceesestsesessesseesouscsessnasosennsossonsnesentecsoot obsebdebsopevesossvose Maintaining the machine csscscsecesesesesrsssssesssssseseesesssesessscssessessessessesseseese Cleaning the Machine cscscssesssersersersssssssscsseessessessesscssessessessesseseeseeseesesseeseess J LTO EPRA AEE EEE toxins doves sen cat E EA E E E E T ds M di Rollers s sisissend esistini AEAEE teini Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers Manual Feed Tray Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for Tray 2 3 4 Cleaning the Media Transfer Rollers for Tray 3 4 seesseeseeeseerereesereereesee Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers for the ADF ee ceeeeeeecneeeceseeeeeeneeees Cleaning the Laser Lensa ro ronen esis gh hieiel ich d ld Gaia ines Troubleshooting sscscsssscsscscessessssesseesessessessesssersessessseesessesseesessecsecssessessesseseeseese 13 1 TNC O DUCTION 5560sc0s eseccs sesh soscodsosedsenseasgssustescesioedsodoessbonsons bes onsensobsnoeecusossodooteoseoesooessoees 13 2 Printing a configuration page ee Unlocking the Scanner 13 3 Preventing Media Misfeeds 13 4 Understanding the Media Path ssssssssssssssssrsssssssscesseseeseeseesscssessessesseseeseeseese 1
199. em with soap and water If toner was inhaled move to an area with fresh air and gargle thor oughly with a large quantity of water If conditions such as coughing appear seek professional medical attention If toner gets in your eyes immediately flush them with water for at least 15 minutes If any irritation persists seek professional medical attention If toner gets in your mouth thoroughly rinse it and then drink 1 to 2 cups of water If necessary seek professional medical attention Store toner cartridges out of the reach of children 11 2 Replacing Consumables Be Refer to the following URL for recycling information US http kmbs konicaminolta us content environment cleanplanetm cpp html Europe http cleanplanet konicaminolta eu Other regions printer konicaminolta com Note The use of non genuine toner cartridges may result in unstable performance In addition any damage caused by the use of non genuine toner cartridges is not covered by the warranty even if it occurs during the warranty period Although damage is not certain to result from using non genuine toner cartridges we strongly recommend that you use genuine toner cartridges Replacing Consumables 11 3 When replacing a toner cartridge refer to the following table For optimum print quality and performance use only approved KONICA MINOLTA toner cartridges for your specific machine type as listed in the table below You can
200. en 2 Press Receive 3 Press Start or press the Start key The machine starts receiving the fax With an external telephone For details on the procedure using the external telephone refer to Remote reception G3 fax on page 4 9 Receiving G3 faxes 4 3 DRPD Select this mode when using DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection If the receiver rings with the pattern selected from the four ring patterns avail able the incoming call is automatically received as a fax In order to use DRPD the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Comm Settings RX Mode to DRPD E With Comm Settings Ring Pattern select the ring pattern for faxing Bey For details on the settings refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 Ring Pattern Refer to the following table and select the ring pattern Settings Ring Pattern Normal Ring L ON L OFF Double L ON S OFF L ON L OFF Triple 1 S ON S OFF L ON S OFF S ON L OFF Triple 2 S ON S OFF S ON S OFF L ON L OFF S ON Short ON On for 150 ms to 600 ms L ON Long ON On for more than 600 ms S OFF Short OFF Off for 100 ms to 1 200 ms L OFF Long OFF Off for more than 1 200 ms Receiving G3 faxes Receiving Internet faxes Settings for receiving Internet faxes e mail must first be specified from the E mail RX POP page of PageS
201. en Min Reduction for RX Print is set to 100 E The pages cannot be split The image is not reduced Tray Selection for RX Print is set to Auto Received documents are printed at full size on paper that fits the length of the received image minus 20 mm As a result up to 20 mm of the trailing edge of the image may be cut off If the length of the received image is more than 20 mm longer than the paper size the image is printed on the next larger paper size most suitable paper size When Print Separate Fax Pages is set to OFF E The received document is automatically reduced between 75 and 96 and printed If the received document still does not fit within a single page even after being reduced up to 75 any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost E The image is reduced in both the main scanning direction and the sub scanning direction while maintaining the original height to width ratio Mf the orientation of the paper to be printed on is different from the orienta tion of the paper that was automatically selected the image will not be automatically rotated 90 When Print Separate Fax Pages is set to ON E The received document is reduced by the specified reduction ratio between 87 and 96 If the document does not fit within a single page the document is split and the remainder is printed on the next page E There is no overlapping section on split pages Bes Pages are
202. en reached Replace the transfer roller After replacing the transfer roller reset its counter For details refer to Maintenance Menu on page 3 63 USB hub is not supported Disconnect USB hub A USB hub is connected to the USB HOST port Disconnect the USB hub from the USB HOST port Status error and service messages Message Cause Solution The USB device is invalid Disconnect USB device An incompatible USB device is connected to the USB HOST port Disconnect the USB device from the USB HOST port IEEE802 1x Auth failed Please reboot IEEE 802 1X port authentication timed out Turn the machine off then on again IEEE802 1x Authenticating Please wait IEEE 802 1X port authentication is being performed If authentication is suc cessful the message is cleared If authentication times out turn the machine off then on again Operator messages Message Cause Solution Configuration of Options Changed Configuration of Options Changed Power Off and ON An optional lower feeder unit was installed or removed while the machine is on Turn the machine off wait a few seconds and then it on again Cover Open Cover is open Close all covers properly The cover is open Close the indicated cover Misfeed Detected Misfeed was detected Re
203. end the fax The document is scanned at an angle The document guides are not adjusted to the width of the document Slide the document guides to fit the width of the document The fax received by the recipient is blurry The document is incor rectly positioned Position the document correctly The original glass is dirty Clean the original glass The text in the document is written too faint Adjust the density There may be a problem with the telephone con nection Check the telephone line and then try send ing the fax again There may be a problem with the recipient s fax machine Make a copy to check that this machine is operating correctly and then if the copy was printed correctly have the recipient check the condition of their fax machine The fax received by the recipient is blank The document was sent with the front side facing down when the ADF is used Load the document to be faxed facing up Problems when sending faxes Symptom Cause Solution Transmission is not pos sible The transmission proce dure may have been performed incorrectly Check the transmission procedure and then try sending the fax again The fax number may be wrong Check the fax number The address book desti nation group destination or program destination may have been regis tered incorrectly Check that th
204. ending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Check your application documentation for more information on printing glossy media Capacity Tray 1 2 Up to 20 sheets depending on their thick ness Tray 3 4 Not supported Print Media 4 9 Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Glossy 1 100 128 g m Media Type Glossy 2 129 158 g m Weight 100 to 158 g m Duplexing Not supported Single Side Only Print on the single side only You can print continuously with single side only paper However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environ ment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Select this setting when paper that should not be used with double sided copying for example when on side has already been printed on is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 90 g m Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets depending on the paper weight Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets depending on the paper weight Tray 3 4 Up to 500 sheets depending on the paper weight Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 3 4 Face up Driver Single Side Only 60 90 g m Media Type Weight 60 90 g m Duplexing Not supported Use single side only paper that is Suitable for plai
205. eparate Scan on page 10 21 To scan multiple document pages using the original glass and send them as combined scan data set Settings Original Settings Sep arate Scan to ON For details on Separate Scan refer to Original Settings Separate Scan on page 10 21 Specify the destination For details on specifying destinations refer to Specifying destina tions on page 10 27 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Mode Check to check or change the specified destinations If necessary specify settings for other parameters in the Settings screen For details on the Simplex Duplex Original Size Original Settings Color Mode and Original Type parameters available from the Set tings screen refer to Specifying document settings on page 10 20 For details on the Background Density Resolution and File Set tings parameters available from the Settings screen refer to Speci fying scan settings on page 10 23 For details on the File Name parameter available from the Settings screen refer to Specifying the document name on page 10 26 For details on the Communication parameters available from the Settings screen refer to Specifying communication settings on page 10 27 5 Press the Start key Press the Start Color key to scan in color or press the Start B amp W key to scan in black and white Bes This machine cannot a
206. er key indicator Press to enter Scan to Folder mode While the machine is in Scan to Folder mode the indica tor on the Folder key lights up in green 6 Copy key indicator Press to enter Copy mode While the machine is in Copy mode the indicator on the Copy key lights up in green About the Control Panel No Name Function Reset key Press to clear the settings except pro grammed settings of all displayed functions Interrupt key indica tor Press to enter Interrupt mode While the machine is in Interrupt mode the indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green To cancel Interrupt mode press the Interrupt key again Stop key Pressing the Stop key while copying scan ning or printing temporarily stops the operation 10 Start Color key Press to start color copying scanning or fax ing Press to continue interrupted printing 11 Start indicator Lights up in blue when copying scanning or faxing can be performed Lights up in orange when copying scanning or faxing cannot be performed 12 Start B amp W key Press to start black and white copying scan ning or faxing Press to continue interrupted printing 13 Keypad Use to enter the number of copies a fax num ber an e mail address or a name Use to type in the various settings 14 C clear key Press to erase numbers or text
207. er used to print reports Auto Reset Settings Specify settings to automatically reset copy settings after the specified time period has lapsed Enable Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to reset after the speci fied time period has lapsed Auto Reset Settings 1 to 9 Default 1 Specify the time required to reset Priority Mode Settings Home Copy E mail Folder Fax Select the function to be displayed on the screen after resetting 3 42 Admin Settings Administrator Registration Item Description Administrator Registration Specify administrator information Name Specify the name of the administrator Extension No Specify the extension number for the adminis trator E mail Address Specify the E mail address for the administra tor Ees This is the From address for E mail messages sent from this machine and the address where machine status notifications will be sent Machine Settings Specify machine information Device Name Specify the name of the machine The name specified for Device Name will be used as the file name for scan data Address Specify the E mail address for the machine Address Registration Item Description Address Book The destination lists for Address Book Group and Program can be pr
208. er IC card information again E When Card Authentication is specified for Authentication Type a regis tered user is authenticated by simply placing the IC card When Card Authentication Password is specified a registered user is authenticated by placing the IC card and entering the password E Press User Name and Password to log in by entering the user name and the password without using the authentication device When Card Authentication is enabled 1 Press Card Authentication Ees When using the ID amp Print function with IC card authentication select Begin Printing or Access Basic Screen as necessary For details on the ID amp Print function refer to ID amp Print on page 6 4 2 Place the IC card on the authentication device When Card Authentication Password is enabled 1 Press Card Authentication Ees When using the ID amp Print function with IC card authentication select Begin Printing or Access Basic Screen as necessary For details on the ID amp Print function refer to ID amp Print on page 6 4 2 Place the IC card on the authentication device 3 Press Password and enter the password 4 Press Login Logging in to this machine 15 7 15 8 Logging in to this machine Appendix A Technical specifications Type Desktop integrated flatbed ADF printer Document holder Stationary unit scanning Photoconductor OPC Luminous source CCFL Dual
209. erPoint data does not hide overlay files 32bit PCL and XPS printer driver only m Send a notification by E mail when printing is finished Shows the version information for the printer driver m Prevent loss when printing fine lines PCL printer driver only Limitations on printer driver functions installed with Point and Print If Point and Print is performed with the following server and client combina tions there are limitations on some printer driver functions E Server and client combinations Server Windows Server 2008 R2 Server 2008 Server 2003 Client Windows 7 Vista XP 2000 Functions with limitations applied Booklet Skip Blank Pages Front Cover Back Cover Separator Page Create Overlay File Print in Overlay Watermark JOBNAME USERNAME and HOSTNAME output of PUL Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5 11 5 12 Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver Proof Print External memory and ID amp Print functions Proof Print Print jobs saved on hard disk can be printed or deleted les If Store Job Print and Hold Secured Job or Proof then Print was selected for Job Retention in the printer driver the job file is saved on the hard disk Printing a job saved on the hard disk QORUN 7 In the home screen press USB HDD Press Proof Print Select a user Press OK Select the job to be printed Press Print Bey If the job was saved with the
210. es No The fax settings are reset to those specified when the machine was shipped from the manufacturer To return all settings to their factory default press Yes and then press OK Ees The address book is not initialized Fax Image Initialized Description Settings Yes No All saved fax data jobs is initialized To initialize press Yes and then press OK The machine is automatically restarted Ees The address book is not initialized 2 20 Fax Settings Admin Settings Sending faxes 3 General operation The general procedure for sending G3 faxes and Internet faxes is described below 1 Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen For details on the initial Fax screen refer to Initial Fax screen on page 1 8 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass For details on loading the original document refer to Positioning the original doc ument on page 3 4 3 Specify the destination For details on specifying destinations refer to Specifying destina tions on page 3 7 Inthe initial Fax screen press Mode Check to check or change the specified destinations 4 Press Settings and then select the appropriate settings on the Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens For details on the Scan Settings screen refer to Specifying scan
211. es 1 11 With account tracks iea nrar eE EEES 1 12 Initial settings cscscsssecsscsecsscssssssscsscssessesecsecseesessessessessesssessessesssessessesseeseeseeseese 1 13 G3 fax SetIngs ira Asda i ala aaah iien el aie ae ends 1 13 Date amp Time Settings oe E TE E EAG 1 13 Fax Target s EE EEEE EEES 1 13 Sender Settings simien in i E E E ERAS 1 13 Comm Settings cceeesesceccescesceeeeeseesecsecsecsecaeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeseesceseeeeeeeeaees 1 13 Contents x 3 Internet fax Settings ec eeeeeeseesceecesceecescescescesecaeceecaecssesaeaseaseaaecsecsecsecaeeseeaeeaeees 1 14 LEP IP Settings naisia ere a oh siiedieods ded lentil ads 1 14 Network Fax Functions Settings ccccceccescessesseseeeeceseeseeseesecseesecaeeneeneees 1 14 Email TX SMTP ess sces8s See ceves cen cse tv e a 1 14 E mail RX POR aa e a A AAEE EAA A A O 1 14 Subject enient iiie suedebatabedas ids ceidbe A ie 1 14 POXE E E E EEEN E E T 1 14 Useful functions ccsccscessccssscscccsessscssessscseesssssseesessessscssesseseesessessscessssssoessossees 1 15 Fax Settings SCreen sscsscsssssssssssssrsesersessessesseessessessesssssscsscssessessessessesseseeseaseesesseess 2 1 Fax Settings User Settings scsscscccssecscssessccssessseceecsssesesesseseessssssssesessseoes 2 2 Senge EEE E dress Rend eas hein Eee eis 2 2 Nighttime RX Settings PBX C
212. es The detailed settings that appear differ depending on the setting selected for Scan Type Bes If Auto is selected as the scanning mode scanning from the original glass is performed after a prescan is performed so that a preview image can be checked E Image size Shows the data size of the scan image Rotation Select the orientation of the image to be scanned Bes If the Rotate back side check box is selected the back side of the image is rotated 180 and scanned Applies only if ADF 2 sided is selected m Auto Deskew Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image m Close Click to close the TWAIN driver window m Prescan Click to begin scanning a preview image m Scan Click to begin scanning m AutoCrop icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image Windows TWAIN Driver Settings 9 5 E Zoom Prescan icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window Mirror icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image m Tone Reversal icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image m Clear icon Click to erase the preview image m Preview window Displays a preview image Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area m Before RGB After Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer s position before and after ad
213. eseeseeaees 1 9 Scanner DAVES penino er Eae EE ESTEK so SEE EEES EAE ENEE EENS 1 9 PE Fax Divers onn eE E E TOR 1 9 Applications CD DVD ne ain n Rhea ial ethan aie y 1 10 Applicaton Seo a E A E E O aeaca cs 1 10 Documentation CD DVD ereraa a EE EET OEEO 1 12 Documentation cnn ieee dS E esas A R aS 1 12 System Requirement 0 ccccsccsessessessesseesecsesseescescesceseecsceaeceecsecsecaeeaeeaseaeeaeeaes 1 13 Contents x 7 2 Control panel and touch panel screens ssseccecescessssssssssssessessessessessessssssseensers 2 1 About the Control Panel cscsscssscssecsecessessscssssssssssessssssscssesesssssessssessessssessessoes Touch panel SCeeNS csccsesercersessessessessssssessessnsessesscseeseesessessessesssesseseesensensessessees FIOM SCHEER E E E sen cde sed Lewes seseeslves E E O Initial Copy mode screen Initial Scan to Folder mode screen Initial Scan to E mail mode screen Initial Fax modeScreen s i c ssschs cls seashet bens aai iiaa saa oai JOD SCLECH Fagg a A es See eR Ss EE as es Status Screen saci Mike ait i a a a rae caida dee USB HDD SCreein fasecssvcesstecetsdessly i Bolte n E EE A ARETE veg GR Keys and icons that appear in the screens ec eceeeeeseeesseeseeeeeceeeeceeceeeeceeseeeeaees 2 13 User authentication and account track woe 2 15 With user authentication cccccccccccescessecsscessessecescesseecscessecescessesecesseeneceseesseeeaees 2 1
214. etc where data is frequently sent E Group Register multiple address book destinations together in a group E Program Register destinations where faxes are frequently sent together with fax settings Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens Bes For details on registering destinations refer to Registering destina tions on page 6 1 Useful functions 1 15 Useful functions Fax Settings screen Fax Settings User Settings The parameters available on the Fax Settings screen User Settings are described below User Settings Machine Settings Copy Settings Scan Settings Print Settings Fax Settings Remote RX Enabled Remote RX No Default Fax Settings Display Fax Activity Settings 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press User Settings 3 Press Fax Settings The Fax Settings screen appears Bey All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Remote RX Enabled Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the remote reception function is used Remote RX No Type in the number 2 digits for performing remote reception 2 2 Fax Settings User Settings Item Description Default Fax Settings Settings Factory Default Current Setting Select the default s
215. ettings 1 15 2 Specify how many rings are produced until the machine begins receiving the fax when it is set for automatic reception Bes The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Target Fax Settings Admin Settings Item Description Redial Settings 0 10 1 Specify the number of times this machine automati cally redials when a fax could not be sent correctly for example if the line is busy or a communication error occurred Bes The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Target Redial Interval Settings 2 15 21 Select the length of the interval in minutes between redial attempts when the machine automatically redi als Bes The available settings and the default setting differ depending on the setting selected for Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Target Line Monitor Settings OFF Until Connection Complete Until Transmission Complete Select whether the line monitoring tone is produced during communication OFF No line monitoring tone is produced Until Connection Complete The line monitoring tone is produced until the connection with the desti nation has been completed after dialing Until Tran
216. ettings for the parameters on the Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Set tings screens that are selected when the machine is turned on or the Reset key is pressed Factory Default The default settings are the manu facturer s default settings Current Setting The default settings are the current settings Display Fax Activity Select whether or not transmission reception infor mation is displayed in the control panel while send ing receiving G3 faxes Fax TX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the number of originals address ID and number of destinations are displayed while G3 faxes are being sent Fax RX Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the number of originals and ID are displayed while G3 faxes are being received Fax Settings User Settings 2 3 Fax Settings Admin Settings The parameters available on the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings are described below Admin Settings Machine Settings Administrator Registration Address Registration Authentication Setting Ethernet External Memory Print Job Timeout Copy Settings Print Settings Fax Settings Sender Settings Sender Maintenance Sender Fax No Menu
217. f a color page is separated into the color pages for yellow magenta cyan and black and each is printed with black gradations as individual pages The printing order is yellow magenta cyan then black OFF Color separation is not performed A normal color separation is performed Emulation Specify the processing method for data received by this machine Default Emulation Settings Auto PS PCL Select the machine emulation language If Auto is selected the machine automatically selects the machine emulation language from the data stream 3 60 Admin Settings PS Specify settings for PostScript errors and data transmissions Wait Timeout Settings O to 300 Default 0 Specify the time until an error is determined to be a PostScript error If 0 is selected no timeout is performed Print PS Errors Settings ON OFF Select whether or not an error page is printed when a Postscript error occurs PS Protocol Settings Auto Normal Binary Select the protocol for data transmissions with a PostScript data stream If Auto is selected the machine automatically selects an applicable protocol from the data stream Auto Trapping Settings ON OFF Select whether or not neighboring colors are printed superimposed in order to prevent white space around images Black Overp
218. f program destinations appears Press Register ok Specify settings for Name and Dest for the program destination and then press OK Press to display the address book screen Select a registered destination 6 Press OK Registering destinations 10 37 10 38 Registering destinations Replacing Consumables Replacing Consumables Note Failure to follow instructions as outlined in this manual could result in voiding your warranty Note If the toner has run out or the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached an error message appears Refer to Error messages on page 13 39 When the time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached print a configuration page and then check the status of the consumables For details on printing the configuration page refer to Printing a configuration page on page 13 2 About Toner Cartridges Your machine uses four toner cartridges black yellow magenta and cyan Handle the toner cartridges carefully to avoid spilling toner inside the machine or on yourself Bey When replacing the toner cartridges install only new cartridges If a used toner cartridge is installed the amount of remaining toner may not appear correctly Do not open the toner cartridge unnecessarily If toner is spilled avoid inhaling it or allowing it to come in contact with your skin If toner gets on your hands or clothes immediately wash th
219. ffect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Check your application documentation for more information on printing letterhead Capacity Tray 1 2 Up to 20 sheets depending on their size and thickness Tray 3 4 Not supported Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Letterhead Media Type Duplexing Not supported Postcard You can print continuously with postcard However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Check your application documentation for more information on printing post cards Capacity Tray 1 2 Up to 20 sheets depending on their thick ness Tray 3 4 Not supported 4 8 Print Media Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 Face up Driver Postcard Media Type Duplexing Not supported Use postcards that are Approved for laser printing DO NOT use postcards that are Coated Designed for inkjet printers Precut or perforated Preprinted or multicolored Be If the postcard is warped press on the warped area before putting it in the tray 1 2 Folded or wrinkled Glossy Media You can print continuously with glossy media However this could affect the media feed dep
220. firm Addr TX is set to ON a destination cannot be selected from the log Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Disable Job History Display is set to ON a destination cannot be selected from the log Specifying destinations 3 9 Bes The following types of transmissions are not recorded in the log PC faxing Fax forwarding and E mail forwarding Transmissions recovered after the machine is turned off then on again Transmissions where the address is directly typed in while the machine is off hook Selecting with an LDAP search Destinations can be selected after searching an LDAP server This can be used if the network contains an LDAP server for example for user manage ment Bes In order to perform an LDAP search the LDAP server must be regis tered with the machine For details refer to the Reference Guide Bey Internet faxing is not compatible with a destination search of an LDAP server 1 In the initial Fax screen press A 2 Press LDAP 3 Select the search method and then perform the search Search Type in the keyword to be searched for Press OK to begin searching Advanced Search Select the appropriate conditions and then type in the keyword to be searched for Press OK to begin searching 4 Select the destination and then press OK To register an address in the address book select the address from the address list and t
221. for destinations Type Select the destination type FTP SMB WebDAV etc Name Directly enter the name of the destination to be searched for Type in the name to be searched for and then press OK to display a list of the search results 4 Select the destination and then press OK To specify multiple destinations select all destinations where the data is to be sent 5D Press OK 10 28 Specifying destinations Directly typing in the address To specify a destination that is not registered with the machine directly type in the address With FTP 1 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input Press FTP 3 Specify settings for Host Name File Path User Name and Password for the destination computer If necessary specify settings for other parameters in the Details screen Pasv Select whether or not the PASV mode is used Proxy Select whether or not a proxy server is used Port No Type in the port number Range 1 to 65535 5 Press OK Bes To specify multiple destinations specify the various settings press Next Dest and then specify the settings for the next FTP destina tion Bey If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on
222. formance use only approved KONICA MINOLTA imaging units for your specific machine type as listed in the table below You can find your machine type and the imaging unit part numbers on the consumables reorder label inside the front cover your machine Machine Machine Parts Imaging Unit Type Imaging Unit Type Number Parts Number Imaging Unit Black K AOWG 03G Imaging Unit Yellow Y AOWG 08G AM A121 011 Imaging Unit Magenta M AOWG 0EG Imaging Unit Cyan C AOWG 0KG Imaging Unit Black K AOWG 03J Imaging Unit Yellow Y AOWG 08J EU A121 021 Imaging Unit Magenta M AOWG OEJ Imaging Unit Cyan C AOWG OKJ Imaging Unit Black K AOWG 03M Imaging Unit Yellow Y AOWG 08M AP A121 041 Imaging Unit Magenta M AOWG OEM Imaging Unit Cyan C AOWG 0KM Imaging Unit Black K AOWG 03P Imaging Unit Yellow Y AOWG 08P GC A121 081 Imaging Unit Magenta M AOWG OEP Imaging Unit Cyan C AOWG OKP Note Do not touch the OPC drum surface This could lower image quality Replacing Consumables 11 11 If the messages Replace Imaging Unit appear replace the specified imaging unit As an example the procedure for replacing the black imaging unit is described below 1 Check the message window to see which color imaging unit needs replac ing 2 Open the machine s front cover 3 Pull the front lever of the color toner cartri
223. front and back cover pages and separator pages Specify the tray that contains the paper for the front and back cover pages and separator pages Stamp Composition Tab Bey Be sure to use overlays with print jobs with a paper size and orienta tion that matches the overlay form In addition if settings have been specified for N in 1 or Booklet in the printer driver the overlay form cannot be adjusted to match the specified settings The settings in the Watermark function of the Stamp Composition tab allows you to Select the watermark to be used Create edit or delete watermarks Adjust the watermark position Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver 5 9 Print a frame around watermarks Print transparent shaded watermarks Print the watermark on only the first page Print the watermark repeatedly throughout the all pages The Copy Protect function prevents unauthorized copying The document is printed with the specified text or pattern in the back ground The background pattern is normally inconspicuous but becomes visible when the document is copied PCL printer driver only The settings in the Overlay function of the Stamp Composition tab allows you to Select the form to use Add or delete overlay files Launch Download Manager to download a form PostScript printer driver only Bes Download Manager Application should be installed earlier Create a form PCL and XPS printer driver only
224. functions A description of the current screen will be displayed Press to display the address book From this screen you can select single destinations and group destinations registered in the address book Press to return to the home screen Appears while scanning and printing when making copies SEP ESB OF BE PR PE Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations Touch panel screens 2 13 Icon Description Appears while printing with PC printing received fax printing and report printing Hb C Appears when using a G3 fax connection aN gt fe Appears when there are documents queued for a timer trans mission Appears when there are fax documents received with memory reception or PC faxing Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit Appears when this unit is receiving data or documents Appears when enhanced security settings have been applied cS Gd k ke E Appears when a USB memory device is connected 2 14 Touch panel screens User authentication and account track If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine the user name or account name and the password must be entered in the Login screen in order to log on The following procedures describe how to log on when user authentication or account track settings have been specified Bes Use
225. g Tray x The paper specified from the touch panel was loaded in the paper tray TWAIN WSD connecting Computer scanning is being performed with TWAIN or a Web Service 13 38 Status error and service messages Error messages Warning messages Message Cause Solution Unable to collate Prints one set only There is not enough space available on the hard disk for collated printing After one copy is printed the error is can celed HDD is low on disk space Delete unneeded file There is too little space available on the hard disk Delete downloaded fonts Otherwise initial ize the hard disk Replace imaging unit Replace imaging unit x The time to replace the imaging unit has been reached Replace the indicated imaging unit Replace toner x Toner empty Replace toner and close front door x The time to replace the toner cartridge has been reached Replace the indicated toner cartridge Replace image transfer belt Replace transfer belt unit The time to replace the transfer belt unit has been reached Replace the transfer belt unit After replacing the transfer belt unit reset its counter For details refer to Maintenance Menu on page 3 63 Replace fusing unit Replace fusing unit The time to replace the fuser unit has been reached Replace the fuser unit Afte
226. g the toner cartridge imaging unit or waste toner bottle refer to Replacing a Toner Car tridge on page 11 6 or Replacing a Imaging Unit on page 11 11 Do not tilt removed toner car tridge otherwise toner may Spill Bes Do not tilt removed waste toner box otherwise waste toner may spill T Attach the cover to the removed imaging unit Cleaning the machine 12 11 8 Insert the laser lens cleaning tool into the imaging unit open ing pull it out and then repeat this back and forth movement 2 or 3 times 9 Install the removed toner car tridge imaging unit and waste toner bottle Bey For details on installing the toner cartridge imaging unit or waste toner bottle refer to Replacing a Toner Car tridge on page 11 6 or Replacing a Imaging Unit on page 11 11 1 0 Close the front cover 1 1 Pull out the tray 2 12 12 Cleaning the machine 1 2 Return the laser lens cleaning tool to its holder on the inside of the tray 2 1 3 Close the cover 1 4 Close the tray 2 1 5 Clean between each of the laser lenses in the same way Bes The laser lens cleaning tool is included with the machine Safely store the laser lens cleaning tool so that it will not be lost Cleaning the machine 12 13 12 14 Cleaning the machine Troubleshooting 1 3 Introduction This chapter provides information to aid you in resolving machine problems you may encounter
227. genta for images printed on thick paper Yellow Settings 5 to 5 Default 0 Finely adjust the density of yellow for images printed on thick paper Black Settings 5 to 5 Default 0 Finely adjust the density of black for images printed on thick paper Monochrome Density Adj Settings 2 to 2 Default 0 Finely adjust the density of printed images with grayscale printing Fine Line ADJ Settings 3 to 2 Default 0 Adjust how fine lines are reproduced by chang ing the applied voltage VC to the electrostatic roller Admin Settings 3 67 AIDC Mode Settings Mode 1 Mode 2 Select the AIDC operation mode Mode 1 Standard mode Mode 2 Low mode Thick Mode Settings Quality Mode Speed Mode In order to prevent toner from clogging within the developer unit as a result of it being driven at half speed select the timing for driving the developer unit at full speed for a fixed length of time when thick paper is being fed Quality Mode While printing on thick paper printing is periodically paused and the devel oper unit is driven at full speed for a fixed length of time Since printing is paused the quality is not affected however a standby time of approximately 70 seconds occurs every 400 seconds or so of half speed operation Speed Mode While printing on thick paper only the drive
228. gs Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable the FTP server Admin Settings 3 45 Telnet Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable Telnet trans missions Bonjour Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable Bonjour Dynamic DNS Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable Dynamic DNS IPP Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable IPP RAW Port Specify the RAW port settings Enable Settings Yes No Select whether or not to enable the RAW port Bidirectional Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to enable RAW port bidi rectional communication SLP Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable SLP SMTP Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable E mail trans mission operations for this machine SNMP Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable SNMP WSD Print Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable WSD printing IPSec Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable IPsec IP Address Filter Specify IP address filtering settings Permit Access Settings Enable Disable Specify access permissions for IP address fil tering Deny Access Settings Enabl
229. he following procedure describes how to change the administrator pass word Press Administrator Password Press Password top Type in the current administrator password and then press OK Press Password bottom Type in the new administrator password and then press OK Press OK OukRWN Limitations of the password rules If password rules have been applied limitations are placed on certain pass words Specified passwords must be changed to meet the conditions Passwords regulated by the password rules Administrator password User passwords Account passwords Passwords for secure documents 3 74 Admin Settings Conditions of the password rules Specify a password of 8 or more digits Uppercase and lowercase letters are differentiated Half width symbols are used The use of symbols such as the quota tion mark plus sign and spaces are limited with some settings be specified changed cannot be specified Enhanced security settings A password that consists of a repetition of the same character cannot When changing the password the same password as that before it is If settings have been specified that are incompatible with the enhanced secu rity settings the enhanced security settings cannot be applied The settings that must be specified or are forcibly set cannot be changed after the enhanced security settings have been applied Required settings The foll
230. he machine automatically redials the number after a certain length of time has passed If necessary the number of redial attempts and the interval between them can be specified For details refer to Comm Settings on page 2 10 Automatic redialing cannot be used if the fax is being sent manually For details on canceling a transmission being redialed refer to Can celing a queued transmission on page 3 23 For details on problems that may occur during transmission refer to Problems when sending faxes on page 8 2 Canceling a queued transmission To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmis sion queued for redialing delete the job from the Job screen 1 In the home screen press Job For details on the home screen refer to Home screen on page 1 6 2 Press Send A list of queued transmission jobs appears 3 Select the job to be deleted and then press Delete 4 Press Yes and then press OK The job is deleted Ees For details on the Job screen refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide If the fax cannot be sent automatic redialing G3 fax 3 23 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification The transmitting subscriber identification can be added to documents sent from this machine This information is printed in the header of the received document as a part of the image Bes For details on the settings for specifying whe
231. he original glass or load it into the ADF Bes For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 3 Press Separate Scan 4 Press ON 5 Press OK 6 Press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key Scanning of the document begins Bes To change the scanning settings press Change Settings T Position the next document page or pages and then press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key Scanning of the document begins 8 Repeat step 7 until all document pages have been scanned 9 After all document pages have been scanned press Finish 7 12 Separate Scan ID Copy The back and front of a card such as an insurance card driver s license or business card can be scanned separately and printed together on a single page ES gt B Bey With the ID Copy operation the zoom ratio is set to 100 Bes The paper sizes that are available for copying are Letter Legal and A4 Bes The card can only be placed on the original glass Position the card to be scanned aligned at the upper left corner of the original glass Since the image is printed 4 mm from the top and left side reposition the card as necessary 1 In the home screen press Copy 2 Press ID Copy 3 Place the card front side down on the o
232. he regis tered destination and then press Details To delete the destination press Delete in the Details screen 5 Enter the information for the destination and then press OK Registering an address book destination 6 3 Settings Item Description Name Type in the registration name for the address book destination Fax number Type in the fax number of the recipient E Tone Press to send push button tones when pulse dialing is being used T appears in the screen m Pause Press to insert a pause when dial ing P appears in the screen E Press to insert a dash as a separator symbol while dialing This has no effect on the dialing E f the machine is being used with a PBX press Outside when registering an outside destination E appears in the screen At the point indicated by E the outside line access number specified on this machine is automatically dialed For details refer to PBX Connection Settings on page 2 17 E f Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Function Settings Cofirm Addr Regis ter is set to ON the fax number must be entered again after OK is pressed avorites or frequently used destinations set to F it For fi tl d destinati t to ON This allows the destination to be found more easily which is useful when destinations are being selected Index Select the search characters that will be used to search for th
233. hen press Save To view the details of an address select the address from the address list and then press Details To specify multiple destinations for a broadcast transmission select all destinations where the fax is to be sent 3 10 Specifying destinations Specifying scan settings From the Scan Settings screen settings for scanning the document can be specified Original Type Select the appropriate image quality setting according to your document Item Description Text Select this setting when scanning documents con taining only text Text Photo Select this setting when scanning documents con taining a combination of text and photos Photo Select this setting when scanning documents con taining only photos Resolution Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned Item Description Standard The document will be scanned at 200 x 100 dpi Fine The document will be scanned at 200 x 200 dpi Super Fine G3 fax The document will be scanned at 400 x 400 dpi only Bez A finer scan has more information to be sent therefore the transmis sion time increases Bz Only Standard and Fine are available for sending Internet faxes If Super Fine was selected the setting will change to Fine before the Internet fax is sent Separate Scan A document can be divided and scanned separately The scan operation can be d
234. hen sending data with the TIFF file format selected MH The data size will become large MMR The data size will become small Default Scan Settings Settings Factory Default Current Set ting Select the default scan settings that are selected when the machine is turned on or the Reset key is pressed Factory Default The manufacturer s default settings are used as the default settings Current Setting The currently specified set tings are used as the default settings 3 16 User Settings Print Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Paper Settings Specify settings for the paper and paper trays Paper Tray Settings Specify settings for the paper trays Default Tray Settings Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Select the paper tray that is given priority Bey Tray 3 and Tray 4 do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed Tray 1 Tray 4 Specify the default settings for Tray 1 through Tray 4 Bey Tray 3 and Tray 4 do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed User Settings 3 17 Paper Size Settings Any Letter Legal Execu tive A4 A5 A6 B5 JIS B6 Govt Letter Statement Folio SP Folio UK Ouarto Foolscap Gov
235. ia size and the margins required by the printer and software constraints the amount of Printable Area a 4 2 mm 0 165 memory available for the full page frame buffer The guaranteed imageable printable area for all media sizes is the page size minus 4 2 mm 0 165 from all edges of the media apply Be When printing in color on legal size media the following limitations The printable area is 347 2 13 7 mm from the leading edge of the paper However there is a non printable area up to 4 2 mm 0 165 from the leading edge The bottom margin is 14 2 mm 0 56 4 12 Print Media Envelopes Envelopes can only be printed on their front sides side where the recipient s address is written In addition printing on the front side in the area overlap ping the back flap cannot be guaranteed The location of this area differs depending on the envelope type Non printable area Non guaranteed printable area Guaranteed printable area Front side Back side can be printed cannot be printed a 4 2 mm 0 165 Bey The envelope print orientation is determined by your application Page Margins Margins are set through your application Some applications allow you to set custom page sizes and margins while others have only standard page sizes and margins from which to choose If you choose a standard format you may lose part of your image due to image
236. inations where scan data is frequently sent can be registered together with scan settings scan settings document settings etc During scanning a program destination can be recalled by pressing the Mode Memory key in the control panel A maximum of 400 program destinations can be registered For details on registering refer to Registering a program destination on page 10 36 10 34 Registering destinations Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination for scan data is described below E mail address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine Bes For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection refer to the Reference Guide Bez FTP SMB and WebDAV destinations can be registered only from the PageScope Web Connection For details on registering from Page Scope Web Connection refer to the Reference Guide Be For details on specifying an address book destination to send scan data refer to Selecting from registered destinations on page 10 27 Bx If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Register ing and Changing Addr_ is set to Restrict a destination cannot be registered from the control panel Registering an address book destination E mail transmission d Pres
237. indicator on the Interrupt key lights up in green and printing of the current job stops 4 Specify the copy settings 5 To make a color copy press the Start Color key To make a black and white copy press the Start B amp W key After the interrupting job has finished printing press the Interrupt key The indicator on the Interrupt key goes off and Interrupt mode is can celed Printing of the job that was interrupted continues 8 2 Interrupting a copy job Copy programs Frequently used copy settings can be stored together as a program to easily be recalled later Storing a copy program Oar ON 7 8 Bes A maximum of 15 copy programs can be stored In the home screen press Copy Specify the copy settings Press the Mode Memory key The copy programs screen appear Press Register Press Name Type in the name of the copy program and then press OK Be For details on entering text refer to Entering text on page A 8 Press OK Press Cancel The initial Copy mode screen appears again Deleting a copy program NOORA OUO N gt In the home screen press Copy Press the Mode Memory key The copy programs screen appear Select the copy program to be deleted Press Delete Press Yes Press OK Press Cancel The initial Copy mode screen appears again Copy programs 8 3 Copying using stored settings copy programs 1 In the home scree
238. ing order for the job Account track settings have been specified but an unregistered account name or password has been entered Enter the correct account name and pass word User authentication set tings have been speci fied but an unregistered user name or password has been entered Enter the correct user name and password The computer may have insufficient memory Check whether a test page can be sent A network connection with the printer controller is not established when connecting via the net work Contact your administra tor This machine may be in enhanced security mode Contact your administra tor Problems when sending faxes 8 5 Problems when receiving faxes If the fax cannot be received correctly refer to the following table and then perform the indicated operation If the fax still cannot be received correctly even after performing the described operations contact your technical repre sentative G3 fax Symptom Cause Solution The received fax is blank There may be a prob lem with the telephone connection or with the caller s fax machine Check that the machine can make clean copies If it can have the caller send the fax again The caller may have loaded the pages back ward Contact the caller Reception is not possi ble The machine is set to receive faxes manually Set the machine
239. ingle Side Only and Special Paper cesses 4 21 Loading Label Sheets Letterhead Postcards Thick Stock and Glossy Media cccessessessessessessesscescesceseeseseeesseceeceeceaceaeeaecnecaecaeeaaeaaeneenee Tray 3 4 Optional Lower Feeder Unit Loading Plain Paper Single Side Only and Special Paper ceceeeeeeeeee 4 27 About Duplex Printing scccssssscssssssssssssssessessesssseeseessssssssessensessessesseesecsees 4 30 How do I autoduplex cee eeeccescescesceseeseeseesecaecsecaecaaeacensenaeaaecsecsecaecaeeseeaeeaeees 4 30 Output Tray cccscsccsscsssscsseeseeseesessessessssrsessessessnsssesseeseesesseessessessessessessesensenseesense 4 32 Media Storage 4 33 Original Media 4 34 Specia onsin sssieessssceessscesacececedeteuvasydssdsy dassauais A E E AEE O AS 4 34 Contents x 9 Documents that can be placed on the original glass ccceeeececeseeeeneeneeees 4 34 Documents that can be loaded into the ADF oo eee ceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeenees 4 34 Loading a Document scsssiccssessoisossescossosssssocsssossoecosscccotsessessssoososscocsosossidos sceso sosscesosse 4 36 Placing a document on the original glass cccceceeceseeceeseesecseeseceeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 36 Loading a document into the ADF ccccescesccsseseceeccestecseceecsecaeeseeaeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 37 5 Using the Printer Driver sssscsscssssssssssssssssssessessssscssessssssessessssssssessessessessonsees
240. ings screen refer to Remote RX Settings on page 2 16 Giving the reception command from an external telephone The procedure for using remote reception is described below 1 When the external telephone rings pick up the receiver and then check that a fax is being sent 2 With the external telephone type in the remote reception number 2 dig its The machine starts receiving the fax 3 Replace the telephone receiver Bes When using remote reception with pulse dialing the telephone must be switched to pulse dialing For details on switching to pulse dialing refer to the instruction manual for the telephone Useful reception functions 4 9 Night reception G3 fax Internet fax Night reception is the function for prohibiting printing of received documents during the specified night times Documents received during the time that printing is prohibited are all printed when the machine is finally able to print In order to use night reception the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set Nighttime RX Settings Night Fax RX Print to ON E With Nighttime RX Settings Night RX Start Time specify the start time for the night E With Nighttime RX Settings Night RX End Time specify the end time for the night Bes For details on the settings refer to Nighttime RX Settings on page 2 17 Bes This function cannot be used together with
241. inted or viewed Address Book Specify settings for printing the list of address book destinations Fax E mail F TP WebDAV SMB Internet Fax Start Number Specify the starting address book destination number Number of Addresses Specify the number of address book destinations List Output Prints the list of address book destinations Admin Settings 3 43 Group Specify settings for printing the list of group destinations Start Number Specify the starting group des tination number Number of Addresses Specify the number of group destinations List Output Prints the list of group destina tions Program Specify settings for printing the list of program destinations Fax E mail FTP WebDAV SMB Internet Fax Address Book Group Address Start Number Specify the starting program destination number Number of Addresses Specify the number of program destinations List Output Prints the list of program destina tions Authentication Setting Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description User List Display Setting Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to display a user list Logout Confirmation Display Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a logoff confirmation message appears after the Access key is
242. ion Standard 200 x 100 dpi Fine 200 x 200 dpi Resolution Reception 200 x 100 dpi 204 x 98 dpi 80 x 38 5 dot cm 200 x 200 dpi 204 x 196 dpi 80 x 77 dot cm 300 300 dpi 200 x 400 dpi 204 x 391 dpi 80 x 154 dot cm 400 x 400 dpi 408 x 391 dpi 160 x 154 dot cm PC fax Fax driver Item Description Operating system Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 Windows Server 2003 32 bit 64 bit Windows XP 32 bit 64 bit Windows Vista 32 bit 64 bit Windows Server 2008 32 bit 64 bit Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 32 bit 64 bit CPU Pentium 3 400 MHz or higher Windows Vista 1 GHz or higher Memory 512 MB or more User s Guide Be For details on other specifications refer to the Printer Copier Scanner Technical specifications Text input The procedure for using the keyboard screen is described below Entering text In the keyboard screen press the character that you want to enter To enter uppercase letters press To enter symbols press 1427 To enter special characters such as accented characters press at To delete the character to the right of the cursor press Delete To move the cursor press lt or gt Bes Numbers can also be typed in with the keypad in the control panel Bes To clear all entered text press the C key Text input Index A E Account track we E mail forwarding
243. ion device first register the card ID of the user in this machine The registered user who is authenticated with the card ID can log in to this machine or execute a print job This section explains how to config ure the required settings in this machine register users and log in to this machine with authentication Bey Do not disconnect the USB cable while using the authentication device Doing so may cause the system to become unstable Ees Do not leave the IC card within 40 mm of the card reader Configuring this machine User authentication settings must be configured with MFP authentication on this machine Configure the user authentication settings using PageScope Web Connec tion Sz For details on using PageScope Web Connection refer to Reference Guide 1 In Administrator mode of PageScope Web Connection click Security tab Authentication General Settings In User Authentication select Device Click Apply to save the settings AON In the General Settings page of Authentication Device Settings select Authentication Type and IC Card Type In IC Card Type specify the required IC card type For Authentication Type specify how to log in to this machine after registration Card Authentication Allows the user to log in by simply placing the IC card Card Authentication Password Allows the user to log in by placing the IC card and entering the password Fo
244. ion failure Sz When connecting or disconnecting the USB cable hold the plug Oth erwise the cable may be damaged If you only enter the card ID when registering a user associate the user with card using the authentication device connected to this machine Associating the user with card using authentication device When a user and card ID have been registered using Data Administrator the user must be associated with the card in the Administrator Settings of the machine 1 AUN z Press Utility Counter key on the control panel of this machine to switch to the Admin Settings screen Press Authentication Setting Press Card Authentication Select a user to be registered and press OK Press All to display all users Press Search to extract target users with search characters Press Edit Press Delete to cancel the registration when IC card information is already registered Place the IC card on the authentication device and press OK This associates the user with the IC card and registers the IC card for the user Logging in to this machine The following explains how to log in to this machine with IC card authentica tion To perform IC card authentication register the information recorded in the IC card in advance 15 6 Logging in to this machine E lf an authentication failure recurs the problem may be due to incorrect registration of IC card information Regist
245. ion function For EU member states only This symbol means Do not dispose of this product together with your household waste Please contact the Local Authority for appropriate dis posal instructions In the case of a new device being purchased the used one can also be given to our dealer for appropriate disposal Recycling of this product will help to conserve natural resources and prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling This product complies with RoHS 2002 95 EC directive Contents T Introduction sessestecscscsecesstenoecsevestovsossoussscsscssssscossosessoosgesvesyesebsecvoatesnenessdsssissdousdsdoussonees 1 1 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 2 Space Requirement 0 0 cc ceeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Part Names 1 4 Front View 1 4 Rear View seses 1 6 Front View with Options 1 6 Adjusting the angle of the control panel 1 7 Drivers CD DVD cecsssceeeeeeneeeceeeees 1 8 Printer Drivers PostScript Drivers ecccssessescessenseeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 8 Printer Drivers PCL Drivers c cesssssceccescesceseeseseesecsecaeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 1 8 Printer Drivers XPS Drivers cccsssssccesceecesceseeseeseesecaeeseeseeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesees 1 8 Printer Drivers PPD Files c cceeceescecceseeeeseeseesecsecsecaeeseeaeeseeeeeeeeese
246. is performed so that a preview image can be checked E Image size Shows the data size of the scan image Rotation Select the orientation of the image to be scanned Bes If the Rotate back side check box is selected the back side of the image is rotated 180 and scanned Applies only if ADF 2 sided is selected m Auto Deskew Specify settings for correcting the skew of the image m Close Click to close the TWAIN driver window m Prescan Click to begin scanning a preview image m Scan Click to begin scanning m AutoCrop icon Click to automatically detect the scanning position based on the preview image 9 10 Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings E Zoom Prescan icon Click to rescan the area selected in the preview window and enlarge it to fit the window Mirror icon Click to display a mirror image of the preview image m Tone Reversal icon Click to reverse the colors of the preview image m Clear icon Click to erase the preview image m Preview window Displays a preview image Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area m Before RGB After Move the pointer in the preview window to display the color tones at the pointer s position before and after adjustments m Width Height Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measure ment units Macintosh TWAIN Driver Settings 9 11 Using a Web Service The scan command
247. is pressed the printer is automatically restarted Restore System Resets the system settings to their defaults After this is pressed the printer is automatically restarted Restore All Resets all settings to their defaults After this is pressed the printer is automatically restarted HDD Format Item Description User Area Print Initializes the user area printing of the hard disk After the reformatting operation is finished turn the machine off then on again User Area Scan Initializes the user area scanning of the hard disk After the reformatting operation is finished turn the machine off then on again All Initializes the hard disk After the reformatting operation is finished turn the machine off then on again Admin Settings 3 77 Paper Empty Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Tray 1 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 1 has run out of paper Tray 2 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 2 has run out of paper Tray 3 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 3 has run out of paper Tray 4 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a message appears when Tray 4 has run out of paper Restriction Code Settings
248. it Folder Auto Del Settings Interval Auto Document Delete Time Document Hold Setting Security Administrator Settings Password Security Password Details Rules Registering and Chang ing Addr Manual Des Admin Settings 3 39 Enhanced Security Mode HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity Overwrite All Mode Data Execute SSD Low level Format Restore Defaults Restore NetWork Restore System Restore All HDD Format User Area Print User Area Scan All Paper Empty Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Restriction Code Settings d Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Admin Settings 3 40 Admin Settings 3 Type in the administrator password default 12345678 Bes If the administrator password default 12345678 is incorrectly entered three times machine operations are locked If this occurs turn the machine off then on again 4 Press OK Machine Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description Sleep Time Setting Settings 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min 10 min 11 min 12 min 13 min 14 min 15 min 30 min 1 Hour 3 Hours Specify th
249. ivided into several sessions for example when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages and then all scanned pages can be faxed as a single document Specifying scan settings 3 11 Procedure Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass Specify the destination Press Settings Press Scan Settings Set Separate Scan to ON Press the Start key The document is scanned Load the next batch of document pages and then press the Start key CO NOOBRWN Repeat this operation until all document pages have been scanned Press Change Settings to change the scan settings 9 After all pages of the document have been scanned press Finish Density Select the density at which the document is to be scanned Nine density levels are available Select the appropriate density setting according to your document Background Removal Select the density of the background color at which documents with a back ground color are to be scanned Nine density levels are available for the background color Sharpness Select the strength of outlines for example on characters and lines for scan ning the document To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness select a setting toward Seven sharpness levels are
250. justments m Width Height Displays the width and height for the selected area in the selected measure ment units 9 6 Windows TWAIN Driver Settings Windows WIA Driver Settings m Paper source Select the paper source m Color picture Select this setting when scanning in color Grayscale picture Select this setting when scanning in grayscale m Black and white picture or text Select this setting when scanning in black and white m Custom Settings Select this setting when scanning with Adjust the quality of the scanned pic ture settings applied Bes If settings have been specified with Adjust the quality of the canned picture Custom Settings is automatically selected m Adjust the quality of the scanned picture Click this message to display the Advanced Properties dialog box In the Advanced Properties dialog box settings can be specified for Brightness Contrast Resolution DPI and Picture type select from color grayscale or black and white es These settings are applied when Custom Settings is selected m Page size Specify the paper size when Page source is set to Document Feeder m Preview window Displays a preview image Drag the rectangle over the image to select an area m Preview Click to begin scanning a preview image m Scan Click to begin scanning m Cancel Click to close the WIA driver window Windows WIA Driver Settings 9 7
251. k boxes for the items to be added and then type in the text up to 80 characters Image tab Item Description Paste Image To add an image to the cover sheet select the Paste Image check box and then specify the image file Only files in the BMP format can be selected Zoom Specify the zoom ratio for the added image Position In the X and Y boxes specify the position of the added image Sending a PC fax Fax driver settings This section describes the settings and buttons common to tabs of the Print ing Preferences or Properties dialog box of the fax driver Be For details on installing the driver refer to the Installation Guide Printing Preferences dialog box Settings for machine specific functions can be specified To display the Printing Preferences dialog box click Properties or Prefer ences in the Print dialog box or right click the printer icon in the Printers or Printers and Faxes window then click Printing Preferences Item Description FAX tab Specify the transmission conditions for PC faxes For details refer to FAX tab on page 5 10 Basic tab Specify settings for the paper and original docu ment to be sent If user authentication or account track settings have been specified on the machine specify the user or account information For details refer to Basic tab on page 5 11
252. k 1 91 150 g m Media Type Thick 2 151 210 g m Weight 91 to 210 g m Duplexing Refer to Specifications on page 4 2 Print Media 4 5 Envelope Print on the front address side only Some parts of the envelope consist of three layers of paper the front back and flap Anything printed in these lay ered regions may be lost or faded You can print continuously with envelope However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Capacity Tray 1 Up to 10 sheets depending on their thick ness Tray 2 3 4 Not supported Orientation Face down Driver Envelope Media Type Duplexing Not supported Use envelopes that are m Common office envelopes approved for laser printing with diagonal joints sharp folds and edges and ordinary gummed flaps Bes Because the envelopes pass through heated rollers the gummed area on the flaps may seal Using envelopes with emulsion based glue avoids this problem E Approved for laser printing m Dry DO NOT use envelopes that have Sticky flaps E Tape seals metal clasps paper clips fasteners or peel off strips for seal ing Transparent windows Too rough of a surface Material that will melt vaporize offset discolor or emit dangerous fumes Been presealed 4 6 Print Media Label A sh
253. kground Density 00 10 8 Binary Division 0 ceseeceeeeee 10 12 Color Mod rna 10 7 E mail secsscciecsstestsscsses ses cstssacstorvons 10 12 E mail Encryption seses 10 12 File Setting 00 cece Original Settings 0 0 Original Size ce eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees Original Type cceeeeeseseeeeeeeeees Resolution 0 Send Use Signature Simplex Duplex Scan to Folder mode Background Density 0 0 00 eee 10 23 Color Mode iiccsiessscassscssnctessedseesese ce 10 22 File Setting wo ee 10 24 10 25 FIP scsusisisvsesdenavezentvetesarstvoasiiesdoess se 10 29 HDD sarkin 10 31 Original Settings 10 21 10 22 Original Size 2 ee eeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeee 10 20 Original Type eceeeeseeseeseereeee 10 23 PE SMB siisccccceccscstcsscseccsvsesescoscnes 10 29 Resolution 0 cceeeceeseeseeteeeeeeeeee 10 24 Simplex Duplex nsession 10 20 URL Notification oe 10 27 URL Notification Destination 10 27 USB Memory secesie scriverne 10 30 Web Service Settings 0 0 0 10 31 WEeDDAY secsisdsssssuiea nace 10 30 Scanner lock lever cece 1 4 Scanner unit oo eee 1 4 Service Messages oseere 13 47 System Requirements 00 1 13 T TEL telephone jack 0 0 0 0 1 4 Text input x iiciscaccaicn eee A 8 Toner cartridge 00000eee 1 4 Touch panel aiee 2 5 Transfer belt unit 0 00 00 ee 1 4 Transfer roller 0 0 cece
254. l or install an authentication device 14 2 Introduction Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 You can install up to one optional lower feeder unit PF P08 Tray 3 4 The lower feeder unit PF P08 increases your machine s media feed capacity by 500 sheets Kit Contents E Lower feeder unit with a tray 500 sheet capacity Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 14 3 Installing a Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 Note Since consumables are installed in the machine be sure to keep the printer level when moving it in order to prevent accidental spills 1 Turn off the machine and discon nect the power cord and inter face cables 2 Prepare the lower feeder unit Be Be sure to place the lower feeder unit on a level surface 3 Open the right side cover of the lower feeder unit Be The right side cover of the lower feeder must be opened before the feeder can be installed onto the machine 14 4 Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 4 With another person s help place the machine on top of the lower feeder unit making sure that the positioning pins on the lower feeder unit correctly fit into the holes on the bottom of the machine A This machine weighs approximately 39 kg 86 Ibs when it is fully loaded with consumables The machine must be lifted by two people 5 Close the right side cover of the lower feeder unit 6 Reconnect all interface cables Lower Feeder Unit PF P08 14 5 T Reconnect the
255. le sided printing Cu 2nd Image Transfer rrent Adjust the 2nd image transfer current Simplex Pass Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing Plain Paper Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of plain paper Thick 1 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of Thick 1 paper Admin Settings 3 65 Thick 2 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of Thick 2 paper Postcard Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of postcards Envelope Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of envelopes Label Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of labels Glossy 1 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of Glossy 1 media Glossy 2 Settings 8 to 7 Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for simplex single sided printing of Glossy 2 media Manual Duplex Adjust the 2nd image transfer output ATVC for duplex
256. ls Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 With USB Memory 1 Plug the USB memory device into the USB HOST port 2 In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input 3 Press USB Memory Bey Ifa USB memory device has not already been plugged in USB Mem ory is not available Specify a setting for Document Name 5 Press OK Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict an address cannot be directly typed in For details on Manual Destination Input refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 10 30 Specifying destinations Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Restrict Scan to USB is set to Restrict USB Memory is not available For details on Restrict Scan to USB refer to Security Settings on page 3 70 Bes With a USB Memory transmission only one destination can be speci fied With HDD In the initial Scan to Folder mode screen press Direct Input Press HDD Press Save Document If user authentication settings have been specified select Public or Pri vate Specify a setting for Document Name Press OK Oo AON Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destin
257. ls refer to the Facsimile User s Guide on the Documentation CD DVD Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 for 64 bit es For details on the installation of the drivers refer to the Installation Guide on the Documentation CD DVD Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 9 Bez For details of the Macintosh and Linux drivers refer to the Reference Guide on the Documentation CD DVD Be Windows TWAIN driver does not correspond to 64 bit applications though it corresponds to 32 bit applications on 64 bit OS Applications CD DVD Applications Applications Use Benefit Download Manager This utility enables fonts and overlay Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista A to Be downloaded tothe nard Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 i Mac OS 10 2 8 10 3 9 10 4 10 5 For details refer to the online help for 10 6 all functions of Download Manager PageScope Net Care Device Man Printer management functions such ager as status monitoring and network set tings can be accessed For details refer to the PageScope Net Care Device Manager User s Guide on the Applications CD DVD PageScope Data Administrator PageScope Data Administrator is an administration tool with which authen tication data and addresses registered with the control panel of supported devices multifunctional OA equip ment can be changed from other computers on the network For details refer to the PageScope Da
258. machine is turned on or the Reset key is pressed Factory Default The manufacturer s default settings are used as the default settings Current Setting The currently specified set tings are used as the default settings Separate Scan Output Method Settings Batch Print Page Print Select whether or not printing begins after all document pages have been scanned when the document is divided and the batches are sepa rately loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document con taining multiple pages Batch Print Printing begins after all pages of the document have been scanned Page Print Printing of pages that can be printed begins while the document is being scanned User Settings 3 15 Scan Settings Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description JPEG Compression Level Settings High Quality Standard High Compression Select the compression method for saving an image in full color High Quality The data size will become large but the image quality will be high Standard Both the data size and image qual ity will be between those of High Quality and High Compression High Compression The data size will become small but the image quality will be low Black Compression Level Settings MH MMR Select this machine s transmission quality w
259. mail mode operations 10 13 Specifying destinations Use any of the following methods to specify destinations m Selecting from registered destinations on page 10 27 m Directly typing in the address on page 10 29 m Selecting from the log on page 10 32 Selecting from registered destinations An address book destination or group destination can be selected from those previously registered on the machine Ees In order to select a registered destination address book destinations and group destinations must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering destinations on page 10 34 Bz In User Settings Machine Settings Scan to E mail Default Tab you can specify the default destination tab in the Scan to E mail mode screen For details refer to Machine Settings on page 3 13 Selecting from the Favorites list When destinations are registered they can be specified as Favorites As a default the Favorites destination list appears when the initial Scan to E mail mode screen is displayed Select a destination from the list To specify multiple destinations for a broad cast transmission specify all destinations where the data is to be sent Bes The setting for the Favorites list can be specified for a destination when it is registered For details refer to Registering an address book destination on page 10 35 Selecting with an index search Destinations can
260. may have been set to ON Printing is performed when the specified night time has ended Internet fax Symptom Cause Solution Reception is not possi ble The cables are not con nected correctly Check that the cables are correctly connected Memory is full Load paper if it is empty and then print the faxes stored in memory Printing is not possible PC Fax RX Settings PC Fax RX Setting may have been set to ON Print the fax from the machine s memory Memory RX Memory RX may have been set to ON Print the fax from the machine s memory Problems when receiving faxes Other problems Symptom Cause Solution The number of docu ment pages indicated in the transmission results report is different from the number of pages ina batch transmission Memory is full During batch transmis sions the number of document pages indi cated in the transmis sion results report may be different from the number of pages in the transmission if the mem ory is full 8 8 Other problems Error messages If a machine malfunction occurs the error screen appears with one of the fol lowing error messages Refer to the following table and then perform the indicated operation If fax transmissions receptions still cannot be performed correctly even after performing the described operations contact your t
261. me and Password for the destination computer If necessary use Browse to search for the shared folder Favorites For frequently used destinations set to ON This displays the destination in the Favorites list allowing it to be found more easily Index Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination 6 Press OK Registering a program destination The procedure for registering a program destination for scan transmissions is described below 10 36 Registering destinations Program destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine Bey For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection refer to the Reference Guide Bey For details on specifying a program destination to send scan data refer to Selecting a program destination on page 10 32 1 Press Scan to E mail or Scan to Folder to display the initial Scan to E mail or Scan to Folder mode screen 2 Specify settings for the various parameters available from the Settings screen For details on the parameters available from the Settings screen refer to Performing Scan to E mail mode operations on page 10 3 and Performing Scan to Folder mode operations on page 10 17 3 In the control panel press the Mode Memory key The list o
262. me RX Settings Item Description Night Fax RX Print Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to prohibit printing of docu ments received during the night Night RX Start Time Specify the start time for the night Night RX End Time Specify the end time for the night Be The function specified from this screen cannot be used at the same time as a function specified from the Forward TX Settings Memory RX and PC Fax RX Settings screens PBX Connection Settings Item Description PBX Function Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a PBX line is connected PBX Number Specify the outside line access number The outside line access number specified here will be dialed before the fax numbers registered with address book destinations and program destinations Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 17 Fax Report Item Description Activity Report Specify the settings for printing activity reports Output Settings Settings Every 100 comm Every Day 100 Daily No Select the conditions for printing Every 100 comm Prints after every 100 com munication jobs Every Day Prints at the specified time every day 100 Daily Prints at the specified time every day and after every 100 communication jobs No Is not printed Output Time Setting Specify
263. media is loaded in the reload it If it still misfeeds do not use tray that media The media is moist Remove the moist media and replace it from humidity with new dry media Envelopes are loaded Envelope must be loaded in Tray 1 in Tray 2 3 4 only Labels letterhead Labels letterhead postcards thick postcards thick stock or glossy must be loaded in Tray stock or glossy are 1 or 2 loaded in Tray 3 4 Custom sized media Custom sized media can be loaded in is loaded in Tray 3 4 Tray 1 or 2 See Print Media on page 4 2 13 24 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds Symptom Cause Solution The recommended label sheet is facing the wrong way in Tray 1 Load the label sheets according to the manufacturer s instructions Envelopes are facing the wrong way in Tray 1 Load the envelopes in Tray 1 with the flaps facing up If the flaps are on the long edge load the envelopes with the flap edge toward the machine and the flap side facing up Unsupported media wrong size thick ness type etc is being used Use KONICA MINOLTA approved media See Specifications on page 4 2 Also refer to http printer konicaminolta com for a complete list of currently approved media The media feed roller is dirty Clean the media feed roller For more details refer to Media Roll ers on page 12 5 Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds
264. ment guide Document output tray T Document stopper iiser E External Memory ceeeeeeeees 6 3 F Front cover ececccceeeseceeesseeeeeesreee 1 4 Fuser unit ccccccescceeesseeeeseneeee 1 4 Imaging unit oo eee 1 4 Int rrupt sisirin ss tiusosss 8 2 L LINE telephone line jack Loading Media 05 Logging in to this machine Lower feeder unit 0 000 1 4 14 3 M Maintenance 2 12 2 Media Clearing misfeeds cece 13 6 Loading ss Path aoeeoe ene E a S Preventing misfeeds 0 0 0 0 cece 13 4 Media Misfeed DU ple sstisrississiserisissipesrsoreuesiksrsas Fuser Unit seesssssssossssessresessesessseo Transfer Roller Tray l sessesvesscescasehseasesatassestacspesseeds Tray Z sesesenss sso ssoseossesacasesvessesvedvessecxe Tray 3 4 tise tes E TE a Media Path incsisciceisiserisssres Messages Error messages sseseeesrieereereeee Operator messages Service messages Status messages Warning messages Meter Count o oo Misfeed problems 008 Mode Memory 0 0 0 0 cece eeeeeeee O Original cover pad ccceeeeees 1 4 Original glass 0 0 0 ce eeeeeesteeeeeeeees 1 4 Original Media Loading cesses ses stscsiseaeiseasensariaacanesess 4 36 Output tray oo eee 1 4 4 32 P Page Margins eececeeseereeeeeeers 4 13 Part Names o 1 4 Power connectio
265. ment will be scanned in color or black and white Item Description Color ON Select this setting to automatically detect the color of the document and scan it with the cor responding setting OFF Select this setting to scan in full color Mono GrayScale Select this setting for documents with many chrome halftones such as in black and white photos Black Select this setting for documents with distinct black and white areas such as in line drawings File Type Bes Black may not be available depending on the setting selected for 10 22 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Original Type Select the appropriate image quality setting according to the content of the document Item Description Text Select this setting when scanning documents containing only text Text Photo Select this setting when scanning documents containing a combination of text and photos Photo Select this setting when scanning documents containing only photos Specifying scan settings The Background Density Resolution and File Settings parameters avail able from the Settings screen can be used to specify scan settings Background Density Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document Item Description Background Removal Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned Nine
266. missions However KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC makes no warranty of any kind including but not lim ited to any implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with regard to this guide KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES INC assumes no responsibility for or liability for errors contained in this guide or for incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the furnishing of this guide or the use of this guide in operating the equipment or in connection with the performance of the equipment when so operated x 2 Contents DL Tntroducti n c5siccesccciccscsssssesdeossscessetcsnsvzescosencecsceesesdeoseSeausedssncodaecd ssncdssecsescecsesdeutes seeseces 1 1 Machine Parts 1 2 Front View 1 2 Rear VieW c cc0cee 1 2 About the Control Panel we 1 3 Touch panel scceeeee 1 6 Home screen 1 6 Initial Fax screenie eiaa a ces divas RR E R eaa a 1 8 Keys and icons that appear in the screens sesssseesssssesereererssereserrsrereeserrersrrseeese 1 9 User authentication and account track seesseessessecsesoessecsosessecesocesecsoossseccoosssessosseseee 1 11 With user authentic tionisnri nises ar A A A AEEA 1 11 Device authentication ccccccccscssecsseessecsecesseesececeeecsecescesseceecesseesecessenseeenes 1 11 External server authentication cccccccssccsscesseesscescesseeescesseeseecsseseecseenseese
267. move the paper A media misfeed occurred Open the indicated cover and remove the misfed media Imaging Unit Missing Install imaging unit and close all doors No imaging unit is installed Otherwise an imaging unit incompatible with the machine has been installed Install the correct imag ing unit Status error and service messages 13 41 Message Cause Solution Toner Cartridge Missing install toner cartridge and close all doors No toner cartridge is installed Otherwise a toner cartridge incompatible with the machine has been installed Install the correct toner cartridge Waste Toner Box Full Replace waste toner box by following the instruc tion The waste toner bottle is full Replace the waste toner bottle Replace Imaging Unit Open front door and replace imaging unit by following the instruction The time to replace the imaging unit has been reached Replace the appropri ate imaging unit Replace Toner x Replace toner by following the instruction and close front door The time to replace the toner cartridge has been reached Replace the appropri ate toner cartridge Paper Size Mismatch Load xxx in Tray x or can cel job The paper size speci fied from the touch panel is different from the size of paper loaded in the paper tray Load paper of the cor rect size into the
268. mstensscsscdeccassedestecesacascesdeacastocseus 6 4 Printing simultaneously with log in 0 eeeeeeceeceecesceseesecneceeceeensesseasenseeseess 6 4 Specifying a job to print Deleting a JOW ts siccccccdoctsscescesdoccuscdsceuccucaccentevecs ni i E cnt Sebandoenaeys 7 Performing Copy mode operations Basic copy Operation cceeeseereeee Original Size sccsccscssccccssssccscessessscsssessecsesssseseesessesessesssesssesssssseesscescesenseces Documents of mixed page SiZes 0 00 0 cessssceeeeseneeeceecseeeceeceesecaesecseseeseaeeerseeeneeaees BAPer RE IEA AIARRA E E OREA AT A bsseessansensescssancenasenssesecossscnassasesueons ZOOM EEE E P OEEO A EAE ETER ORN ET Duplex Combine Density 0008 Original Type Color Mode isscisucsssssetscsoscessoseoeoossoseunsosessoasesdesnoscesdosnososssostunsesessonsonssseesesddebasdosenosoeasoss Finishing cassccsscstcassacscenssncsccnssencebsscvscossccaasostesnasncssosesusecnseedssonsesessosssoasonsosdsonsssensonesenese Proof Copy coieseesesissssrscorrssiorcoseessocreseestosrssososisssrsesorocsssscosroverseocresososies rs dorosssoesssoe Proof Copy operation j 3 iiioeeriewaaetiiiieiiatavineiee E A ER e i Separate Scan sssssssssesrocresssessescsssessossos ssssssosse Scanning the document in separate batches TD Copy cscesccssessessecscssssscessssenseseeseeseeseees Bs Paper Margin scssscscesssscssssssssssssssssssessessens
269. n ceee 1 4 Power switch o ae 1 4 Print Media 00 a 4 2 A CO S 4 13 Stota E wnvisscedcnssacansescdeancdeusestavanacec cae 4 33 Print media type A 12 Index Envelope siena ete ee ations 4 6 Glossy Media cceceeeeseeeseeeteees 4 9 Babel e tate ete 4 7 Letterhead sariin 4 8 Plain Paper Recycled Paper 4 4 Postcard isussoniesninnimeninsuns 4 8 Single Side Only oo eee 4 10 Special Paper cecccceeeseeteeeeee 4 11 Thick Stock sicer 4 5 Print quality oe 13 31 Print Setting Copy Settings ccccccseseseseeeeees 3 15 Fax Settings ccccccscseseeeeeeeeees 3 20 Machine Settings cess 3 13 Print Settings 2 0 ceseseeeeeees 3 17 Scan Settings 20 0 ceeeesesseeeeeeees 3 16 Printable Area ee 4 12 Printer driver Advanced Tab sssr 5 7 Basic Tab eroaren 5 8 Cover Mode Tab 5 9 Displaying ssrin 5 5 Layout Tab secesecsereiseipeiscisenieas 5 9 My Tabi sisi deneiasien ee 5 8 Other Tab oo cccccseeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 5 11 Quality Tab oo eeeeeeeee serene 5 10 Uninstalling oo eee ecesecseeneeteenee 5 4 Watermark Overlay Tab 5 9 Program eee 10 34 Program Address cee 10 36 Proof Print ennonn 6 2 R Rear tover sireoyoossosaississiey epis 1 4 Registering a user ee 15 3 Right door iiscscsssicsecdusccsisaessdesiesecsens 1 4 S SCAM MOE soorci 9 2 Scan to E mail mode 0 10 3 Bac
270. n press Copy 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF Bey For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 Press the Mode Memory key The copy programs screen appear Select the copy program to be recalled Press Detail The settings screen appears Check the copy settings stored with the selected copy program Press Close Press OK The initial Copy mode screen appears again Press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key O OND OA O Copy programs Scanning From a Computer Application Basic Scanning Operation Documents can be scanned from a computer connected to this machine via a network Scanning settings can be specified and the scanning operation can be performed from TWAIN or WIA compatible applications From the scan ner driver a preview can be displayed and various adjustments such as the size of the scan area can be specified Ees For details on the installation of the scanner driver or network TWAIN settings refer to the Installation Guide on the Documentation CD DVD 1 Position the document to be scanned Bes For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 2 Start the application to be us
271. n paper laser printers such as standard or recycled office paper m Plain paper that has been printed on with same printer DO NOT use single side only paper that is m Not approved for use as plain paper 4 10 Print Media Special Paper You can print continuously with special paper However this could affect the media feed depending on the media quality and printing environment If problems occur stop the continuous printing and print one sheet at a time Select this setting when special paper for example high quality paper is loaded as plain paper with a weight of 60 90 g m Capacity Tray 1 Up to 100 sheets depending on the paper weight Tray 2 Up to 250 sheets depending on the paper weight Tray 3 4 Up to 500 sheets depending on the paper weight Orientation Tray 1 Face down Tray 2 3 4 Face up Driver Special Paper 60 90 g m Media Type Weight 60 90 g m Duplexing Refer to Specifications on page 4 2 Use special paper that is Approved for laser printers DO NOT use special paper that is Not approved for use as plain paper Print Media 4 11 Printable Area The printable area on all media sizes is up to 4 2 mm 0 165 from the edges of the media Each media size has a specific image able area the maximum area on which the printer can print clearly and without distortion This area is subject to both hardware limits the physical med
272. nd excessive media curl E Make sure two people are avail able to lift the machine when moving it Keep the machine level to avoid toner spillage E When lifting the machine fold up Tray 1 and then lift the machine as shown in the illustration at the right If the optional lower feeder unit is installed move it and the machine separately Do not grasp the grip of Tray 3 or the right side cover otherwise the lower feeder unit may be damaged f you get toner on your skin wash it off with cool water and a mild soap If you get toner in your eyes wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor E Make sure any parts removed during cleaning are replaced before you plug in the machine Maintaining the machine 12 3 Cleaning the machine Be sure to turn off the machine and unplug the power cord before cleaning Exterior Control Panel Ventilation Grill 12 4 Cleaning the machine Media Rollers The accumulation of paper dust and other debris on the media rollers can cause media feeding problems Cleaning the Media Feed Rollers Manual Feed Tray 1 Open Tray 1 2 Press down on the center of the paper lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs white lock into place Cleaning the machine 12 5 3 Clean the media feed rollers by wiping them with a soft dry cloth 4 Close the tray Cleaning the machine Cleaning the Me
273. ner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge with the color causing the abnormal image Replace it with a new toner cartridge One or more of the imaging units may be defective Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it Lateral lines or bands appear on image The machine is not level Place the machine on a flat hard level surface The media path is dirty with toner Print several sheets and the excess toner should disappear One or more of the toner cartridges may be defective Remove the toner cartridges and check for damage If it is damaged replace it One or more of the imaging units is Remove the imaging units and check for damage If it is damaged replace it defective Colors look One or more of the Remove the toner cartridges and verify drastically toner cartridges may that the toner is distributed evenly on wrong be defective each cartridge roller and reinstall the toner cartridges 13 36 Solving Problems with Printing Quality Symptom Cause Solution Colors are Gradations are not Set Print Settings Quality Settings not register adjusted correctly Gradation Adjustment Tone Calibra ing properly The front cover is tion in the Admin Settings menu to colors are opened during the ON and then perform the AIDC color mixed or calibration calibr
274. ng instructions show the procedure to replace the toner cartridge Y Note Dispose of the used toner cartridge according to your local regulations Do not burn the toner cartridge For details refer to About Toner Cartridges on page 11 2 4 Check the color of the new toner cartridge to be installed Replacing Consumables 11 7 5 Remove the toner cartridge from the bag 6 Shake the cartridge to distribute the toner T Peel off the protective film from the right side of the toner car tridge Replacing Consumables 8 Make sure that the toner car tridge is the same color as the machine compartment and then insert the toner cartridge into the machine Bey Fully insert the toner car tridge 9 Pull the lever to the right to lock it in place Ees The front lever should be securely returned to its original position other wise the front cover of the machine cannot be closed Ng If it is difficult to operate the lever push it in 1 0 Make sure that the toner car tridge is securely installed and then peel off the protective film Replacing Consumables 1 1 Close the front cover Bes When closing the front cover press the area of the cover with small pro jections 11 10 Replacing Consumables Replacing a Imaging Unit When replacing a imaging unit refer to the following table For optimum print quality and per
275. ng media misfeeds as the fuser unit and other internal parts may be very hot Do not place anything on top of the machine Use a soft cloth to clean the machine Never spray cleaning solutions directly on the machine s surface the spray could penetrate through the air vents of the machine and damage the internal circuits Avoid using abrasive or corrosive solutions or solutions that contain sol vents such as alcohol and benzene to clean the machine Always test any cleaning solution such as mild detergent on a small inconspicuous area of your machine to check the solution s performance Never use sharp or rough implements such as wire or plastic cleaning pads Always close the machine s covers gently Never subject the machine to vibration 12 2 Maintaining the machine E Do not cover the machine immediately after using it Turn it off and wait until it cools down Do not leave the machine s covers open for any length of time especially in well lit places light may damage the imaging units Do not open the machine during printing Do not tap media stacks on the machine Do not lubricate or disassemble the machine Do not tilt the machine Do not touch the electrical contacts gears or laser devices Doing so may damage the machine and cause the print quality to deteriorate Keep media in the output tray at a minimum level If the media is stocked too high your machine may experience media misfeeds a
276. ng stored media do a trial print and check print quality Media Storage 4 33 Original Media Specifications Documents that can be placed on the original glass The following types of documents can be placed on the original glass Document type Sheets books three dimensional object Document size Maximum size Legal Copy and Scan 30 216 x 30 356 mm Fax 140 216 x 148 356 mm Weight Maximum weight 3 kg Observe the following precautions when placing a document on the original glass m Do not place objects weighing more than 3 kg on the original glass other wise the glass may be damaged m Do not press down extremely hard on a book spread on the original glass otherwise the original glass may be damaged Documents that can be loaded into the ADF The following types of documents can be loaded into the ADF Document media type Plain paper 50 to 128 g m Weight Document size Maximum size Legal Mixed document sizes Legal Letter Copy and Scan 140 216 x 148 356 mm Single sided Double sided Fax 140 216 x 148 1000 mm Single sided 140 216 x 148 356 mm Double sided Media capacity 50 sheets media weight 80 g m 4 34 Original Media Do not load the following types of documents into the ADF Documents containing pages of different sizes Wrinkled folded curled or torn documents Highly translucent or transparent documents such as ove
277. ngs Print Night RX Start Time Night RX End Time PBX PBX Connection Function Settings PBX Number Fax Report Activity Output Report Settings Output Time Setting Output Limit Setting TX Result Report TX Result Report Image 3 34 Admin Settings TX Reserve PC Fax TX Error Report Broadcast Report Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Screen l Fax RX Error Report List Print Fax Setup Pg Fax Target Fax Factory Default Fax Image initialized Maintenance Print Menu Event Log Menu Halftone 64 Cyan 64 Magenta 64 Yellow 64 Black 64 Halftone 128 Cyan 128 Magenta 128 Yellow 128 Black 128 Admin Settings 3 35 Halftone 256 Cyan 256 Magenta 256 Yellow 256 Black 256 Gradation Activity Report Scan Send Report Print Scan Event Log Printer Leading Plain Paper Adjustment Edge Adjustment Thick 1 Thick 2 Envelope Side Edge Tray 1 Adjustment Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 3 36 Admin Settings
278. ngs are available when Booklet is selected If Left Binding is selected the pages can be folded as a AN left bound booklet If Right Binding is selected the pages can be folded as a right bound booklet NI 1 Load paper into the tray From the printer driver specify duplex double sided printing Layout tab in Windows 3 click OK Be With autoduplexing the back side is printed first and then the front side is printed About Duplex Printing 4 31 Output Tray All media is fed out facing down into the output tray of the machine This tray has a capacity of approximately 250 sheets A4 Letter of 80 g m paper Bes If the media is stacked too high in the output tray your machine may experience media misfeeds excessive media curl or static buildup 4 32 Output Tray Media Storage E Keep media on a flat level surface in its original wrapper until it is time to load it Media that has been stored for a long time out of its packaging may dry up too much and cause misfeeding Em If media has been removed from its wrapper place it in its original pack aging and store in a cool dark place on a level surface Avoid moisture excessive humidity direct sunlight excessive heat and dust Store paper in a location with a temperature between 0 C and 30 C and humidity between 30 and 85 Avoid leaning against other objects or placing it in an upright position Before usi
279. nitial Scan to E mail mode screen For details on the initial Fax screen refer to Initial Scan to E mail mode screen on page 2 9 2 Position the document to be scanned For details on loading the original document refer to Loading a Docu ment on page 4 36 3 Press the Mode Memory key 4 Select the desired program destination from the list and then press OK The settings and destination addresses are recalled Bey Only one program destination can be selected 5 Press the Start key Press the Start Color key to scan in color or press the Start B amp W key to scan in black and white 10 16 Specifying destinations Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Basic Scan to Folder operation The basic procedure for the Scan to Folder operation which sends scan data to the machine s hard disk a USB memory device or to a folder on the net work is described below 1 Press Scan to Folder to display the initial Scan to Folder mode screen Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 17 2 Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass For details on loading the original document refer to Loading a Docu ment on page 4 36 If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF set Settings Original Settings Separate Scan to ON so that the document can be divided and scanned separately For details refer to Original Settings S
280. nning the image image are missing The The PageScope Web The PageScope Web Connection web based _ Connection Adminis Administrator password has a 0 char utility cannot trator s password is acter minimum and an 16 character be accessed incorrect maximum For details of the PageScope Web Connection adminis trator password refer to the Refer ence Guide on the Documentation CD DVD Media is The media is moist Remove the moist media and replace it wrinkled from humidity or hav with new dry media ing water spilled on it The media feed roller Check them for damage If necessary or fuser unit is defec contact Technical Support with the tive error information Unsupported media Use KONICA MINOLTA approved wrong size thick media See Specifications on ness type etc is page 4 2 being used Solving Other Problems 13 29 Symptom Cause Solution Data was An error message is Handle according to the message dis sent to the displayed in the mes played machine but sage window it doesn t A job may be can Click the User Authentication button in print celled if user authen the printer driver and then type in the tication setting is necessary information before printing specified The hard The hard disk was When the control panel displays HDD disk was full is low on disk space delete print jobs automati and resources fonts forms etc cally
281. nnot be used together with polling reception Check Dest amp Send The specified fax number is compared with the remote fax number CSI and the data is sent only if the fax numbers match If they do not match the com munication will fail resulting in a transmission error Bey In order to use this function the recipient s fax number must be speci fied on their fax machine Specifying communication settings G3 fax 3 13 Useful transmission functions G3 fax With Comm Method in the Comm Settings screen useful transmission functions can be specified Bes For details on Polling RX refer to Polling reception G3 fax on page 4 6 Timer TX A timer transmission can be specified Timer transmission is the function for sending a fax at a specified time Multi ple destinations can be specified A maximum of 16 timer transmissions including transmissions being redialed can be queued To send a timer transmission press Yes and then use the keypad to type in the transmission time The time can be set in hours and minutes The day cannot be specified In order to send a timer transmission the date and time must first be specified on the machine For details on the date and time settings refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide This function cannot be used together with Internet fax transmissions or polling reception If information was incorrectly entered press the C key to e
282. not loaded into the ADF when scanning a document containing pages of different sizes Load the document into ADF Matching Paper not Available Paper of matching size not available Xxxxx Paper of the same size as the document cannot be selected with the Auto Paper setting selected in Copy mode Load the paper tray with paper of the same size as the document Out of the Range of Auto Zoom Zoom ratio for paper size is outlying Select other paper or zoom ratio An appropriate zoom ratio cannot be selected with the Auto Zoom setting selected Specify a zoom ratio between 25 and 400 Place Original on Glass Unable to scan from ADF with this zoom ratio The selected zoom ratio 200 or more cannot be used to scan from the ADF Place the document on the original glass Duplex Copy Disabled Duplex copy disabled Cancel it or select A5 Legal Plain Paper Thick 1 2 The selected paper type and size cannot be used with duplex double sided printing Cancel duplex dou ble sided printing or change the paper type and size settings 13 44 Status error and service messages Message Cause Solution Memory Full Scan Insufficient memory The job is cancelled The memory capacity is insufficient Otherwise the SSD storage area is insufficient Cancel the job HDD Capacity Over
283. not rent lease sublicense lend or transfer versions or copies of the Software Lic ensee does not use or Software contained on any unused media except as part of the per manent transfer of all Software and Documentation as described above 10 INNO EVENT WILL KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY CONSE QUENTIAL INCIDENTAL INDIRECT PUNITIVE OR SPECIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST SAVING EVEN IF KMBT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR FOR ANY CLAIM BY ANY THIRD PARTY KMBT OR ITS LICENSOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THE SOFT WARE EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WAR RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS SOME STATES OR JURISDIC TIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL CONSE QUENTIAL OR SPECIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU x 3 11 Notice to Government End Users The Software is a commercial item as that term is defined at 48 C F R 2 101 consisting of commercial computer software and commercial computer software documentation as such terms are used in 48 C F R 12 212 Consis tent with 48 C F R 12 212 and 48 C F R 227 7202 1 through 227 7202 4 all U S Govern ment End Users acquire the Software with only those rights set forth herein 12 You agree that you will not export the Software in any form in violation of
284. not split when the following settings have been specified even if Print Separate Fax Pages is set to ON When Tray Selection for RX Print is set to a specific drawer for print ing When Min Reduction for RX Print is set to 100 When Paper Priority is set to Fixed Size or Size Priority When Duplex Print is set to ON Printing received faxes 4 13 Adding reception information Reception information can be added to documents received at this machine This information is printed in the footer of the received document The following information can be printed as the reception information E Reception date time E Communication number E Page number total number of pages Bes For details on the settings for specifying whether or not reception information is printed and where to print the reception information refer to Header Footer Settings on page 2 9 4 14 Adding reception information Sending receiving a PC fax 9 Sending a PC fax Using the fax driver a G3 fax can be sent from this machine through opera tions performed on the computer without using any paper es In order to perform a PC Fax operation the fax driver must be installed For details on installing the driver refer to the Installation Guide Bey The fax driver is not compatible with IPP Internet Printing Protocol Transmission operation The procedure for sending a PC fax is described below 1
285. nts x 15 x 16 Contents Introduction Getting Acquainted with Your Machine Space Requirements To ensure easy operation consumable replacement and maintenance adhere to the recommended space requirements detailed below 1068 mm 42 0 150mm 288mm 100mm 5 9 530 mm 20 9 11 3 3 9 H oja lt ca h aa Jo Cc 22 7 Front View E pg ry E ge a NEN t ali oS RK 2 lt E g E Ko E N Q ive wo Y AA 70 mm 937 mm 36 9 2 8 Side View 1 2 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine E NI K EIC o QV 2 El E Q a ive Q les E ER Be x Y 376 mm 14 8 cay 954 mm 37 6 Side View with Options Bes The option appears shaded in the above illustrations Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 3 Part Names The following drawings illustrate the parts of your machine referred to throughout this guide so please take some time to become familiar with them Front View 1 Control panel 2 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 a ADF feed cover 2 b Document guide 2 c Document feed tray 2 d Document output tray 2 e Document stopper Bey Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal size paper with the ADF 3 USB HOST port Ees A USB hub can be con nected to the USB HOST port In addition
286. on is disabled the machine checks for paper of the next most suit able size in the order listed in the following table starting from the top Most suitable paper A4 Letter Legal size Order for selecting A4 Letter Legal paper A4 Letter from top to bottom Legal A4 Bes If no paper suitable for printing is loaded in a paper drawer a message appears instructing that paper be loaded Bes For details on the Auto Tray Switch function refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide Reducing and splitting The following four reducing and splitting operations are performed when a received document is printed depending on the selected settings Bey For details on the reducing and splitting settings for printing received documents refer to Function Settings on page 2 12 When Tray Selection for RX Print is set to a specific drawer E lf the received document is the same size or is shorter than the paper loaded in the drawer the image is printed reduced by the specified reduc tion ratio between 87 and 96 E lf the received document is longer than the paper loaded in the drawer the image is automatically reduced between 75 and 96 and printed If the received document still does not fit within the paper even after being reduced up to 75 any part of the image that does not fit within the paper will be lost E The pages cannot be split Printing received faxes Wh
287. onnection Settings ccccceccecesesseeseesecsecsecsecaeeseeneeseeeeeseeseeeeceseeeeteseeeeees 2 17 PPAXHREP OLE A E E E aban tesvens E E E List Print en A aed E he det eden A ARE Fax Target i aa EER A OEA OA RNET Fax Factory Default Fax Image Initialized Sending faxes ccsccscrsersersersecsessecsecssessessessssesssessseseeseeseeseesecsscssessessessessessesseseese 3 1 General Operation sscssessessesssssssscsscsssessesenssssssseseeseeseesecssssscssessessesseseesenseesenss 3 2 Positioning the original document ccsesesssesessessessesessesceesessessessessessessssseseessees 3 4 Using the A DEn a iis aie eee ee Se ee Pe ae 3 4 Using the original glass cinnara aaea oaia ast a La ET Eis 3 5 Specifying destinations esssessesesesseeesesecsesesosecoesecoeseeosecoesesesoeeesorecoesesoeseeeseeossesesseeeseee 3 7 Selecting from the registered destinations cece sceecseeeeeeceeeeesenevsceseneeecseceeeeens 3 7 Selecting from the Favorites list ccecssecsessceecreserseceesessceessesseseneceeeeessees 3 7 Selecting with an index search occ cessesseseeeneeeceecseeeceeceesecnesevseseeeesaeaes 3 7 Selecting by searching for a destination type OF NAME eects eee eeteeetees 3 8 Directly typing in the address eeeeeessessessceeceeceeceseecescensecsecaecaeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 CGS aK ah eee teh eat ee PMs thls Sk be Ad SAMs AE EE 3 8 T ternet TAK ices E E ds sau potydesnn E be lwis
288. onto the computer m Comment Add a simple comment to the settings to be saved Afterward the saved settings can be selected from the drop down list To change the registered setting click Edit In addition predefined settings can be selected The predefined settings are those for 2 in 1 Photo and Gray Scale Select Default Setting from the drop down list to reset the functions in all tabs to their default values Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver Printer View Click the button to display an image of the printer in the figure area When this button is clicked it changes to the Paper View button when a tab other than the Quality tab is selected or the Quality View button when the Quality tab is selected Be This button does not appear on the Advanced tab Paper View Click the button to display a sample of the page layout in the figure area When this button is clicked it changes to the Printer View button Bey This button does not appear on the Quality tab Quality View Click the button to display a sample of the settings selected in the Quality tab When this button is clicked it changes to the Printer View button Bes This button appears only when the Quality tab is selected Printer Information Click this button to start up PageScope Web Connection Bey This button is available only if a network connection has been estab lished
289. opped during the scan opera tion 15 Error indicator Flashes in orange if an error occurred Lights up in orange when the service representative is being called 16 Data indicator Flashes in blue while a print job is being received Lights up in blue while printing or when a print job is queued 17 Utility Counter Press to display the Utility Settings screen key From the Utility Settings screen settings can be specified for the parameters in the Accessibility Meter Count Address Registration User Set tings and Admin Settings screens About the Control Panel 2 3 No Name Function 18 Mode Memory Press to store the desired settings for copy fax or key scan operations In addition stored settings can be recalled 19 Access key If user authentication or account track settings have been applied press the Access key after entering the user name and password for user authentica tion or the account name and password for account track in order to log on to this machine While logged on press the Access key to log off 2 4 About the Control Panel Touch panel screens Home screen Scanto Folder hd ul fe 10 9 8 7 6 No Indication Description 1 Status Displays messages about the current operating sta tus 2 Fax Press to enter Fax mode For details refer to the Facsimile User s Guide 3 Scan to E m
290. or at least guide you to the proper sources for help Printing the configuration page page 13 2 Unlocking the Scanner page 13 3 Preventing media misfeeds page 13 4 Understanding the media path page 13 5 Clearing media misfeeds page 13 6 Solving problems with media misfeeds page 13 23 Solving other problems page 13 26 Solving problems with printing quality page 13 31 Status error and service messages page 13 38 Printing a configuration page Press the Utility Counter key Press User Settings Press Print Settings Press Print Reports Press Print Press OK NOORON Press Configuration Page 13 2 Introduction Unlocking the Scanner 1 Lift open the ADF cover 2 Move the scanner lock lever to 3 Close the ADF cover 4 Turn off the machine and then turn it on again Unlocking the Scanner 13 3 Preventing Media Misfeeds Make sure that Media matches the machine specifications Media is flat especially on the leading edge The machine is on a hard flat level surface You store media in a dry location away from moisture and humidity You always adjust the media guides in the tray after inserting the media a guide that is not properly adjusted can cause poor print quality media mis feeds and machine damage You load the media printing side up in the tray many manufacturers place an arrow on the end of
291. orite Setting Click this button to change the saved settings For details refer to Saving fax driver settings on page 5 14 Default Click this button to return the settings to those specified when the driver was installed View Displays a sample page layout based on the cur rent settings so the transmission result image can be checked Icons for the specified functions appear at the bot tom Printer Information Click this button to start Web Connection and check the printer information This button is avail able only when your computer can communicate with this machine Fax driver settings 5 9 FAX tab The settings available on the FAX tab are described below Item Description Resolution Select a resolution for the fax Selecting a higher resolution may increase the communication time Print Recipient File Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent This function can also be speci fied as a transmission condition when sending a fax For details refer to Specifying transmission condi tions on page 5 4 Timer Send Specify the transmission time Click Reflect Cur rent Time to add the current time set on the com puter to the Send Time box This function can also be specified as a transmission condition when sending a fax For details refer to Specifying transmission condi tions on page 5 4
292. ossees Print Media o ssisisiscncsssscssscnncesasccsccsccvasGnsoesaehssoedassatensooeesosnccvassasseseessnsenssnsossssonacososcessens Specifications aiioe siets ianea i EENES A A EEE EA aant Type Sree AE EEAS Plain Paper Recycled Paper Thick Stock Emvel Ope sss sc 25 Jcsis esos sccds can cde ceu steals cau cases ion Jee dade due sue a cobedv chest cub cutout cotdensettea sede 1 EET oI ERP EE e EN sc cages estes nc A A A T EE EE Letterh ad aiiin Ache a deen A E E NE A Postcard E AE E E a E A EVE A Glossy Media Single Side Only Special Paper Printable Area eee Envelopes ninenin Page Margins lt avevecicssecvess oes sesavsasvdevevecevesedvsccbes sees swsdes EE cdecda sae custdesasbenced ses teases se Loading Media scscsssssssessecseesessessessesssessessnssseeseesesseeseesecsscsscssessessessesscsensensoese How do I load media oo eee eceseseseceecseeecsesessecuenecseceeseaesevsesaenevscsaeseeecseraeeesnees 4 14 Tray 1 Manual Feed Tray 0 cccccececcescessesseseesecsecsecsecesesceesecsecsecaeeseeseeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 14 Loading Plain Paper Single Side Only and Special Paper ccceeeeeseeee 4 14 Othe Medi dt 254 AN ENEA E ths Bes rt No tole oe iesAd SAAD E 4 16 Loading Envelopes ss isnie neee EE EEE V EE eE EESE 4 17 Loading Label Sheets Letterhead Postcards Thick Stock and Glossy Medi z mionn die a ae BIG en ee as 4 19 Tray 2 ege eei a E pine ttasin Seaas Louse E E a 4 21 Loading Plain Paper S
293. ou may use Roman Font Programs to reproduce weights styles and versions of letters numerals characters and symbols Typefaces on the display or monitor for your own internal busi ness purposes 3 You may make one backup copy of the Host Software provided your backup copy is not installed or used on any computer Notwithstanding the above restrictions you may install the Host Software on any number of computers solely for use with one or more printing sys tems running the Printing Software 4 You may assign its rights under this Agreement to an assignee of all of Licensee s right and interest to such Software and Documentation Assignee provided you transfer to Assignee all copies of such Software and Documentation Assignee agrees to be bound by all of the terms and conditions of this Agreement 5 You agree not to modify adapt or translate the Software and Documentation 6 You agree that you will not attempt to alter disassemble decrypt reverse engineer or decompile the Software 7 Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation and any reproductions thereof shall remain with KMBT and its licensor 8 Trademarks shall be used in accordance with accepted trademark practice including iden tification of the trademark owner s name Trademarks can only be used to identify printed output produced by the Software Such use of any trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that trademark 9 You may
294. over page Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned and then both the front and back sides of the remain ing pages will be scanned 10 4 Performing Scan to E mail mode operations Original Size Specify the size of the document that is to be sent Item Description Standard Size Select the size of the document Select Letter Legal to scan a document con taining different page sizes Custom Size Specify the size of the document if itis a non standard size Press X and Y and then type in the document size X can be set between 30 mm and 356 mm 1 18 inches and 14 00 inches Y can be set between 30 mm and 216 mm 1 18 inches and 8 50 inches Original Settings Separate Scan A document can be divided and scanned separately The scan operation can be divided into several sessions for example when the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF or when the original glass is being used to scan a document containing multiple pages and then all scanned pages can be sent as a single document Place the document in the ADF or on the original glass Press Scan to E mail to display the initial Scan to E mail mode screen With Original Settings in the Settings screen set Separate Scan to ON Press the Start key The document is scanned a A ON Place the next document page on the original glass and then press the Start ke
295. owing settings must first be specified in order to apply the enhanced security settings Administrator mode parameters Required settings Security Settings Administrator Password Specify a password that meets the conditions of the password rules Security tab in PageScope Web Connection Authentication Setting General Settings User Authenti cation Select Device or External Server Security tab in PageScope Web Connection PKI Settings Device Certificate Register a self signed certificate in order to perform SSL communica tions Network tab in PageScope Web Connection SNMP Settings SNMP v3 Settings auth password Specify passwords for auth pass word and priv password that meet the conditions of the password rules SSL in PageScope Web Connection Select AES 256 or AES 256 3DES 168 S MIME in PageScope Web Con nection Select 3DES AES 128 AES 192 or AES 256 Admin Settings 3 75 Changed settings For increased security the following settings are set when enhanced security settings are applied Mode is set to OFF Be A changed setting cannot be changed when Enhanced Security Be If password rules have been applied a password that does not meet the conditions of the password rules is considered a failed attempt during authentication Administrator mode parameters Changed
296. per you removed and then align it well 6 Load the paper face up in Tray 3 or Tray 4 Bey Make sure that the paper is flat Bey Do not load paper above the t mark Bes Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper T Close Tray 3 or Tray 4 13 12 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from the ADF 1 Open the ADF feed cover 2 Remove the document from the ADF document feed tray 3 Lift to open the ADF cover Clearing Media Misfeeds 13 13 4 Remove any misfed media 5 Close the ADF cover 6 Close the ADF feed cover 13 14 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Duplex 1 Pull the lever and then open the right door Bey Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 2 Carefully pull out the misfed media N y Ns 3 Close the right door 13 15 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed from the Fuser Unit 1 Pull the lever and then open the right door Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 2 Lift up the 2 levers 3 Open the fuser unit cover Clearing Media Misfeeds 13 16 4 Carefully pull out the misfed media w O Q 2 fb S amp 3 Q amp O D D S 3 Q Qe xs o 5 gt su oao Scs ess aos S g amp D S D 2L 9 S s z Bz 13 17 Clearing
297. power cord and turn on the machine 8 Declare Paper Source Unit 3 4 in the Windows printer driver Properties Configure tab Working Table WT P01 Provides an area to temporarily place an original or other materials This is also used when the authentication device is installed Kit Contents a Working table b Mounting plate 14 6 Working Table WT P01 c Four screws d Two screws S Bey Use this part when installing the Authentication Device IC card type Store the part in a safe place for future use e Two clamps Installing a Working Table WT P01 1 Using a coin turn the screws c to install the mounting plate Working Table WT PO1 14 7 gt 3 Install the working table CA 5 CZ gt i X xX WIG ji Working Table WT P01 14 8 4 Using a coin tighten the screws c 5 Using a coin tighten the screws d AKT Working Table WT P01 14 9 14 10 Working Table WT PO1 Authentication device IC card type Using authentication device IC card type The authentication device IC card type is an IC card authentication system that reads the IC card to perform personal authentication Using this system you can perform authentication with an IC card to log in to this machine or execute a print job when User Authentication is enabled in this machine To use the authenticat
298. pressed Card Authentication Displayed only when the authentication device is connected and used to register IC card information for the user For details refer to Authentication device IC card type on page 15 1 3 44 Admin Settings Ethernet Bes All factory default values are shown in bold Item Description TCP IP Specify network settings for the machine Enable Settings ON OFF Select the setting for connecting to this machine through a network Bes If OFF is selected the TCP IP parameters do not appear IP Address Settings 0 0 0 0 Specify the IP address used by this machine on the network Subnet Mask Settings 0 0 0 0 Specify the subnet mask Gateway Settings 0 0 0 0 Specify the gateway address DHCP Settings ON OFF If there is a DHCP server on the network spec ify whether the IP address and other network information are automatically assigned by the DHCP server BOOTP Settings ON OFF If there is a BOOTP server on the network specify whether the IP address and other net work information are automatically assigned by the BOOTP server ARP PING Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the ARP PING command is used when the IP address is assigned HTTP Settings Enable Disable Select whether or not to enable HTTP FTP Settin
299. ption has been enabled detailed permis sion settings can be specified Bey This appears only if Encryption Level is set to Yes and a password has been specified for Document Permissions Printing Allowed Select whether to allow the data to be printed Allow to prohibit printing Restrict or to allow printing only at a low resolution Low Resolution Changes Allowed Select whether to allow or prohibit document edit ing such as signing entering text and annotating the data and select the permission level if it is allowed Level 1 Pages can be inserted deleted and rotated Level 2 Annotations can be created data can be entered in form fields and signatures can be added to existing signature fields Level 3 All operations except page extracting can be performed Level 4 Data can be entered in form fields and signatures can be added to existing signature fields Level 5 The page layout can be changed data can be entered in form fields and signatures can be added to existing signature fields Bey Levels 1 2 3 and 5 appear only when Encryption Level is set to Low Levels 1 2 3 and 4 appear when Encryption Level is set to Middle or High Enable Copying Select whether to allow text and images in a docu ment to be copied Allow or to prohibit it Restrict Specifying the document name Specify the document name for the s
300. r Driver 9 Selecting Driver Options Defaults for Windows Before you start working with your printer you are advised to verify change the default driver settings Also in case you have options installed you should declare the options in the driver Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 2000 1 Choose the driver s properties as follows o BW N Windows 7 Server 2008 R2 From the Start menu choose Devices and Printers to display the Devices and Printers directory Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon and then click Printer Proper ties Windows Vista Server 2008 From the Start menu click Control Panel then Hardware and Sound and then click Printers to open the Printers directory Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 XPS printer icon and then click Properties Windows XP Server 2003 From the Start menu choose Printers and Faxes to display the Printers and Faxes directory Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose Properties Windows 2000 From the Start menu choose Settings and then Printers to display the Printers directory Right click the KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PCL6 or KONICA MINOLTA bizhub C35 PS printer icon and choose P
301. r User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list Press Access Basic Screen Press Login This authenticates the user and returns to the home screen In the home screen press USB HDD Press ID amp Print Select Login User or Public User as the user who sends a job Select the job to be deleted Press Delete Press Yes and then press OK ID amp Print 6 5 6 6 ID amp Print Performing Copy mode operations Basic copy operation The general procedure for making copies is described below In the home screen press Copy Bes When the Start Color or Start B amp W key is pressed in the home screen the job can be copied with the defaults 2 Place the document on the origi nal glass or load it into the ADF Be For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 3 Specify the desired copy settings Bes For details on specifying document size settings refer to Original Size on page 7 4 For details on specifying paper size settings refer to Paper on page 7 5 For details on specifying zoom ratio settings refer to Zoom on page 7 6 For details on specifying double sided copy settings refer to Duplex Combine on page 7 7 For
302. r Copier Scanner User s Guide 4 Scan to Folder Press to enter Scan to Folder mode For details refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide 5 Copy Press to enter Copy mode For details refer to the Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide Date time Shows the current date and time USB HDD Press to print files on a USB memory device Press to print a print job saved on hard disk Touch panel No Indication Description 8 Status Press to view information on consumables and devices 9 Job Press to check a print transmission reception or storing job 10 Toner supply indica tors Shows the amount of toner remaining for yel low Y magenta M cyan C and black K Touch panel Initial Fax screen Fax gt Favorites Select dest J airet others off Hook 01 09 2006 03 28 No Indication Description Favorites Press to display frequently used destinations 2 Direct Input Press to directly enter a destination address Others Press to select a destination from the log Doc uments saved on the machine s memory can also be used 4 Off Hook Press to send or receive a fax manually 5 Mode Check Press to check the currently specified destina tions and settings From this screen specified destinations can also be deleted Settings Press to specify fax settings 7 me Press to ret
303. r authentication and account track settings are specified from Pag eScope Web Connection For details refer to the Reference Guide With user authentication Device authentication 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list 2 Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used External server authentication 1 Specify a name and password for User Name and Password For User Name the name can be specified either by directly typing it in or selecting from a list 2 Specify a server for Server Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used Bey If account track settings have been applied account track will be per formed after Login is pressed However if the machine has been set to synchronize user authentication and account track and an account had been specified for the user who is logging on account track will not be performed For details refer to the Reference Guide User authentication and account track 2 15 Logging in using the authentication device The following describes how to log in to this machine with IC card authentica tion To perform IC card authentication register the information recorded in the IC card in advance m fan authentication failure recurs the problem ma
304. r details on how to log in to this machine refer to Logging in to this machine on page 15 6 15 2 Using authentication device IC card type 5 Click Apply to save the settings Ifthe card function setting page appears specify the necessary set tings 6 Exit PageScope Web Connection Then proceed with the user registration Registering a user Register a user using Data Administrator The following two methods can be used E Connect the authentication device to your computer and use Data Admin istrator to register the target user and card at a time E Connect the authentication device to this machine and associate the user who has been registered using Data Administrator with an IC card Registering a user using Data Administrator To use Data Administrator configure this machine and set up Data Adminis trator For setup install the IC Card Driver USB Driver of the authentication device and then install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin Bey Before setup install Data Administrator V4 0 or later in your computer For the Data Administrator operating environment and installation pro cedure refer to the Data Administrator User s Guide Checking the version of the installed Data Administrator 1 From the Help menu of Data Administrator select Version Information Ees This software cannot be used if the version is 3 x Install 4 x If Data Administrator V3 x is installed it is remo
305. r replacing the fuser unit reset its counter For details refer to Maintenance Menu on page 3 63 Replace waste toner box Prepare new waste toner box The time to replace the waste toner bottle is near Prepare the new waste toner bottle Status error and service messages 13 39 Message Cause Solution Toner is low Prepare new toner cartridge x The time to replace the toner cartridge is near Prepare the new toner cartridge Replace imaging unit soon Prepare new imaging unit x The time to replace the imaging unit is near Prepare the new imag ing unit Replenish paper Replenish paper Trayx There is no paper in the paper tray Appears when Paper Empty Admin Settings is set to ON For details refer to Paper Empty on page 3 78 Load paper into the paper tray Incorrect toner cartridge Install proper toner cartridge x A toner cartridge incompatible with the machine has been installed Replace the indicated toner cartridge with a correct one Incorrect Imaging Unit Install proper imaging unit x An imaging unit incompatible with the machine has been installed Replace the indicated imaging unit with a cor rect one Replace transfer roller unit Replace transfer roller unit The time to replace the transfer roller has be
306. r to print graphics with a reduced density by reducing the amount of toner that is used ON The amount of toner used is reduced when printing OFF The amount of toner used is not reduced when printing PCL Settings Specify settings for PCL printing Contrast Settings 15 to 15 Default 0 The contrast of the image can be adjusted Image Printing Specify settings for RGB image data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB Select the color space for RGB image data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB image data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced RGB Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYkK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB image data Bk CMYK Gray CMYKkK Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using only black Admin Settings 3 53 Text Printing Specify settings for RGB text data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB
307. rase the entered information If the machine is off at the specified transmission time the fax will be sent the next time that the machine is turned on For details on canceling a queued transmission job refer to Cancel ing a queued transmission on page 3 23 3 14 Useful transmission functions G3 fax Password TX A password transmission can be specified Password transmission is the function for sending a fax with a password applied This function can be used if the recipient s fax machine is compatible with closed network receptions If the recipient s fax machine is set for closed network receptions this machine must transmit with the same password as the closed network recep tion password specified on the recipient s machine To send a password transmission press Yes and then use the keypad to type in the closed network reception password specified on the recipient s fax machine Be If information was incorrectly entered press the C key to erase the entered information Bes This function cannot be used together with F code transmissions or polling reception F Code TX An F code transmission can be specified F code transmissions are the function for sending a fax to a specific recipi ent s box with a specified Sub address and password To send an F code transmission press Yes Press Sub Address or Pass word and then use the keypad to type in the corresponding settings
308. ray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB text data Bk CMYK Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using only black Destination Pro file Settings Auto Select the destination profile Auto A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based ona combination of the specified color matching halftones and other profiles Destination profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile Admin Settings 3 57 Graphics Printing Specify settings for RGB graphics data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB AppleRGB AdobeRGB1998 ColorMatchRGB BlueAdjus tRGB Select the color space for RGB graphics data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Relative Color Absolute Color Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB graphics data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced Relative Color Relative color is applied
309. rd Print a single copy for proofing Specify user authentication and account track settings Print on the back side of paper that has already been printed on Bey Use paper that has been printed on with this printer In addition the page printed with this setting is not guaranteed Do not use the following types of paper Paper that has been printed on with an inkjet printer Paper that has been printed on with a monochrome color laser printer copier Paper that has been printed on with any other printer or fax machine 5 8 Using the Postscript PCL and XPS Printer Driver Bes To display a list of jobs saved with a Job Retention setting press USB HDD in the home screen and then press Proof Print Print the document by selecting the job in the list The password must be entered if one has been specified for the job Layout Tab The Layout Tab allows you to Print several pages of a document on the same page N in 1 printing Print a single copy for enlargement and print several pages PCL printer driver only Rotate the print image 180 degrees Specify whether or not blank pages are printed PCL and XPS printer driver only Specify duplex double sided printing Specify booklet printing Specify binding position Adjust the binding margin Specify the position on the paper where the document is to be printed PCL printer driver only Cover Mode Tab The Cover Mode Tab allows you to Print
310. re shown in bold Item Description Startup Page Setting Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a startup page is printed when the machine is turned on Auto Continue Settings ON OFF Select whether or not printing continues when a size error occurs during printing Admin Settings 3 49 Paper Specify settings for the paper used for printing Default Paper Specify settings for the paper that is normally used Paper Size Settings Letter Legal Executive A4 A5 A6 B5 JIS B6 Govt Letter Statement Folio SP Folio UK Quarto Foolscap Govt Legal 16K 4x6 Kai 16 Kai 32 Env C6 Env DL Env Monarch Env Chou 3 Env Chou 4 B5 ISO Env 10 J Postcard J Post card D 8 1 813 1 4 8 1 2x13 1 2 Custom Size Select the paper size Be The default setting is Letter for USA and Canada and A4 for other countries Custom Size Press Width and Length and then type in the paper size Setting range for Width For inches 3 63 to 8 50 inches For millimeters 92 to 216 mm Setting range for Length For inches 5 83 to 14 00 inches For millimeters 148 to 256 mm Bes These settings can be specified if Paper Size is set to Custom Size Paper Type Settings Plain Paper Recycled Thick 1 Thick 2
311. re to print the transmitting subscriber identification and for printing the recipient information in the transmitting subscriber identification refer to Header Footer Set tings on page 2 9 G3 fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identi fication E Sender s name E Fax numbers of the sender or recipient E Date time that transmission begins E Communication number E Page number total number of pages Bes For details on the registering the name and fax number of the sender this machine refer to Sender Settings on page 2 8 es During a manual transmission the total number of pages is not printed in the transmitting subscriber identification Internet fax The following information can be printed as the transmitting subscriber identi fication E From address of the Internet fax E mail E Date time that transmission begins E Communication number E Page number total number of pages Bey When sending Internet faxes transmitting subscriber identification is added inside the document 3 24 Adding the transmitting subscriber identification Receiving faxes 4 Receiving G3 faxes The following reception modes are available with this machine Select the one that fits your environment m Automatic reception on page 4 2 E Manual reception on page 4 3 E DRPD on page 4 4 Ees When the machine is turned off faxes cannot be received
312. reports lists on page 7 4 To stop a queued G3 fax and Internet fax transmission or a G3 fax transmission queued for redialing delete the job from the Job screen For details refer to Canceling a queued transmission on page 3 23 If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned scanning cannot continue To send the document pages that have already been scanned press the Start key To stop the transmission press the Stop key Internet fax documents will be scanned and sent with the following attributes File type Monochrome TIFF Coding method TIFF S MH General operation 3 3 Positioning the original document With this machine the document can be placed in the ADF or on the original glass Using the ADF If the ADF is used documents containing multiple pages can be automatically scanned and faxed In addition double sided documents can also be faxed 1 Place the document face up in the ADF 2 Slide the document guides against the edges of the docu ment ax Bes Lower the document stopper when scanning Legal size paper with the ADF If the document contains more pages than can be loaded into the ADF the doc ument can be divided and scanned separately For details refer to Separate Scan on page 3 11 A document containing a combination of Letter and Legal size pages can be scanned with the ADF When scanning a document containing a
313. return to the home screen Touch panel screens Initial Scan to Folder mode screen 1 2 3 Folder gt Favdrites Direct pul 12 12 2009 07 45 No Indication Description Favorites Press to display frequently used destinations 2 Direct Input Press to directly enter an address of the selected destination type 3 Log Press to specify a destination from the log Mode Check Press to check the currently specified Scan to Folder mode settings 5 Settings Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method 6 Press to return to the home screen a Touch panel screens Initial Scan to E mail mode screen 1 2 3 E mail gt Favofites Direct put ni 01 02 2006 03 18 No Indication Description Favorites Press to display frequently used destinations Direct Input Press to directly enter a destination address Press to specify a destination from the log 1 2 3 Log 4 Mode Check Press to check the currently specified Scan to E mail mode settings 5 Settings Press to specify settings such as the document scanning method la Press to return to the home screen Initial Fax mode screen For details on the initial Fax mode screen refer to the Facsimile User s Guide Touch panel screens Job screen 08 24 2009 19 01
314. rhead transpar encies or diazo photosensitive paper Coated documents such as carbon backed paper Documents printed on paper thicker than 128 g m Documents with pages bound together with paper clips or staples Documents that are bound in a book or booklet Documents with pages bound together with glue Documents with pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts Label sheets Offset printing masters Documents with binder holes Original Media 4 35 Loading a Document Placing a document on the original glass 1 Lift to open the ADF cover 2 Position the document on the original glass Bey Align the document with the arrow on the left side toward the rear of the machine 4 36 Loading a Document 3 Gently close the ADF cover Loading a document into the ADF 1 Put the document into the ADF document feed tray face up Bey Before loading a docu ment into the ADF check that no document pages remain on the original glass Ng Load the document pages so that the top of the document is toward the back or the right side of the machine 2 Adjust the document guides to the document size Bes For details on copying the loaded document refer to Performing Copy mode operations on page 7 1 For details on scanning refer to Scanning From a Computer Application on page 9 1 Loading a Document 4 37 4 38 Loading a Document Using the Printe
315. riginal glass Be For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 4 Press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key Scanning of the front side begins 5 Position the card back side down at the same location on the original glass Be To copy only the front side press Print 6 Press the Start Color key or the Start B amp W key Scanning of the back side begins The copy is fed out ID Copy 7 13 Paper Margin Copies can be printed with a binding margin so they can easily be stored in filing binders Item Description E Specify the width of the binding margin between 0 1 mm and 20 0 mm 0 001 inches and 0 787 inches None Select this setting to leave no binding margin Be If part of the image is lost due to the binding margin setting reduce the zoom ratio before printing copies 7 14 Paper Margin Image Quality The quality can be adjusted for the document to be scanned Item Description Background removal Adjust the background density when copying docu ments with a colored background such as newspa pers or recycled paper or thin documents where the back side is visible from the front side Adjust the background density to one of nine lev els Select a setting in the direction to darken the background or select a setting in the direction to lighten the backgro
316. rint Settings Text Graphic Text OFF Specify whether black objects are printed superimposed on a neighboring color in order to prevent white space around black characters or figures If Text Graphic is selected superimposed printing is applied to text and graphics If Text is selected superimposed printing is applied to text PCL Specify settings for the PCL language CR LF Mapping Settings CR CR LF LF CR CRLF LF LF CR CR LF LFCR CR CRLF LF LFCR Select the definitions of the CR LF codes in the PCL language Line Page Settings 5 to 128 Default 60 Specify the number of lines per page in the PCL language Admin Settings 3 61 Font Setting Specify font settings for the PCL language Font Number Settings O to 102 Default 000 Specify the default font in the PCL language The font numbers that appear correspond to the PCL font list For details on printing the font list refer to Print Settings on page 3 17 Pitch Size Settings 0 44 to 99 99 Default 10 00 Specify the font size in the PCL language If the setting selected for Font Number is for a bitmap font Pitch Size appears If the setting selected for Font Number is for an outline font Point Size appears Symbol Set Settings PC8 Desktop IOS4 ISO6
317. rinted toner cartridges are will not print correctly or not at all if the cartridges are empty The wrong media is being used Check that the media type Solving Other Problems 13 27 Symptom Cause Solution Not all pages A different user acci Try printing the remaining pages print dentally canceled the job The tray is empty Check that the tray is loaded with media in place and secure A document is printed Print the overlay file using a suitable with an overlay file printer driver which has been cre ated by an unsuit able printer driver Machine The power cord is not Turn off the machine confirm that the resets or correctly plugged into power cord is correctly plugged into turns off fre the outlet the outlet and then turn on the quently machine A system error Contact Technical Support with the occurred error information You are Media or settings are Make sure that you are using correct experienc not correct media ing duplex 7 ee problems E See Specifications on page 4 2 Also refer to http printer konicaminolta com for a complete list of currently approved media Do not duplex custom sized media envelopes labels postcards letter head or glossy media m Make sure that you have not mixed media types in the tray In the Windows printer driver Layout Print Type choose 2 Sided Set duplex
318. ription PDF Select this setting to save the data in the PDF format Compact PDF Select this setting to save the data compressed more than with the PDF format TIFF Select this setting to save data in the TIFF for mat JPEG Select this setting to save the data in the JPEG format XPS Select this setting to save data in the XPS for mat Bes The File Type parameter may not be available depending on the set tings selected for Color Mode and Resolution Be If File Type is set to Compact PDF Resolution can only be set to 300x300dpil File Settings Scan Setting Select whether the data is divided into individual pages or multi page data is created when multiple pages are scanned Item Description Single Page Select this setting to save the data divided into individual pages Multi Page Select this setting to save the scan as multi page data Performing Scan to E mail mode operations 10 9 File Settings PDF Encrypt Specify the encryption settings when PDF or Compact PDF is selected Item Description Encryption Yes Select this setting to enable encryption Level After selecting this setting set the encryp tion level to Low Middle or High No Select this setting to disable encryption Password Type in the password required to open encrypted data up to 32 characters Document Permissions Type in the password req
319. rivers Operating System Use Benefit Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 XP These drivers give you access to all of Server 2003 2000 the printer features including finishing and advanced layout For details refer to Displaying Printer Driver Set tings for Windows on page 5 5 Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 for 64bit Be A specific PPD file has been prepared for applications such as Page Maker and Corel Draw that require that a PPD file be specified when printing When specifying a PPD file while printing on Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 and 2000 use the specific PPD file provided on the Drivers CD DVD Printer Drivers PCL Drivers Operating System Use Benefit Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 XP These drivers give you access to all of Server 2003 2000 the printer features including finishing and advanced layout For details refer to Displaying Printer Driver Set tings for Windows on page 5 5 Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 XP Server 2003 for 64bit Printer Drivers XPS Drivers Operating System Use Benefit Windows 7 Vista Server 2008 These drivers give you access to all of Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista the printer features including finishing Server 2008 for 64bit and advanced layout For details on the installation method and functions refer to the Reference Gui
320. roperties If you have installed options proceed with the next step Otherwise skip to step 9 Select the Configure tab Check that the installed options are correctly listed If not proceed with the next step Otherwise continue with step 8 Click the Acquire Device Information to automatically configure installed options Selecting Driver Options Defaults for Windows Bes The Acquire Device Information is available only if bi directional communication is available with the printer otherwise it is grayed out If Windows Server 2008 R2 7 Vista Server 2008 is being used Acquire Device Information can also be clicked when the machine is connected via USB From the Device Option list select an option one at a time and then select Installed or None from the Setting menu Click Apply Bes Depending on the version of the operating system Apply may not appear If this is the case continue with the next step Select the General tab Click Printing Preferences Printing Preference dialog box appears Select the default settings for your printer such as the default media for mat you use in the appropriate tabs Click Apply Click OK to exit from the Print preference dialog box Click OK to exit from the Properties dialog box Selecting Driver Options Defaults for Windows 5 3 Uninstalling the Printer Driver for Windows This section describes how to uninstall th
321. rror occurred while an Internet fax is being received This error is automati cally cleared 8 10 Error messages Appendix A Technical specifications G3 fax Item Specifications Compatible lines PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network PBX Private Branch eXchange Compatibility ECM Super G3 Modem speed 2 4 kbps 33 6 kbps Fax transmission speed 3 sec page at A4 33 6 kbps JBIG V 34 Coding method MH MR MMR or JBIG Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX RX Maximum scanning size ADF 216 mm x 1000 mm Original glass Legal Maximum recording size Legal Pages with a maximum length of 1 000 mm can be received or printed depending on the selected page splitting setting Edge erase 4 0 mm top bottom left and right Resolution Standard 200 x 100 dpi 8 x 3 85 dot mm Fine 200 x 200 dpi 8 x 7 7 dot mm Super Fine 400 x 400 dpi 16 x 15 4 dot mm Super Fine Reception only 200 x 400 dpi 8 x 15 4 dot mm Internet fax Item Description Protocol Internet fax Simple mode TCP IP SMTP POP3 Fax memory 256 MB for G3 fax and Internet fax TX RX File type Monochrome TIFF Coding method Transmission TIFF S MH Coding method Reception TIFF S MH TIFF F MH MR MMR Technical specifications Item Description Resolution Transmiss
322. rtuguese Hangul Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Czech Hungarian Polish Slovak Russian Dutch Danish Nor wegian Swedish Finnish Greek Turkish Catalan Jap anese Specify the language for the screens that appear in t he touch panel Measurement Unit Setting Settings Inch mm Select the that appea Ees The measurement units for the values r in the touch panel screens default setting is Inch for 120V model and mm for other models User Settings 3 13 Paper Tray Settings Specify paper tray settings Auto Tray Switch Settings ON OFF Select whether or not a paper tray loaded with paper of the same size is selected automati cally when a paper tray that was selected man ually becomes empty while printing copies Enable ATS APS Specify the paper trays that are selected when the paper tray is automatically changed Be Tray 3 and Tray 4 do not appear if the optional lower feeder units have not been installed Tray 1 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not Tray 1 can be selected with the automatic tray switching feature Tray 2 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not Tray 2 can be selected with the automatic tray switching feature Tray 3 Settings ON OFF Select whether or not Tray 3
323. s Broadcast Reservation Report This report provides a detailed record of broadcast timer transmissions The Broadcast Reservation Report is printed automatically when a broadcast timer transmission is queued Bes With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report TX Reserve whether or not to print the Broadcast Reservation Report can be spec ified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description Destination Shows the registration name or address of all des tinations for the broadcast transmission Create Time Shows the time that the transmission was queued Start Time Shows the time that transmission will begin Prints Shows the number of pages that were scanned Note Shows remarks regarding the transmission For details check the margin of the report Printing reports lists PC Fax TX Error Report This report is printed if an error occurred preventing a PC fax transmission from being completed correctly Bes With Admin Setting Fax Settings Fax Report PC Fax TX Error Report whether or not to print the PC fax transmission error report can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description Destination Shows the registration name or fax number of all destinations for the broadcast transmission Create Time Shows
324. s able Press the Utility Counter key and then set Admin Settings External Memory Print to Enable The file format file extension is not one that can be printed Only files with the format extension for JPEG TIFF XPS or PDF can be printed Press USB HDD and then with External Memory File Type select the type of files to be displayed A public user is not specified for user Contact the administrator of this unit defective or empty authentication Printing The machine is set to It takes more time to print with special takes too a slow printing mode media When using regular paper much time for example thick make sure that the media type is set stock properly in the driver The machine is set to It takes time for printing to start in power saving mode power saving mode The job is very com Wait No action needed plex A toner cartridge for a Install a correct KONICA MINOLTA different region or an toner cartridge approved for your spe unapproved toner cific machine cartridge is installed Incorrect toner car tridge is displayed in the message win dow If an error has been Wait No action needed detected during print ing job transmission in the Copy mode it takes a while to pro cess the error and resume the printing operation Blank pages One or more of the Check the toner cartridges The image are p
325. s so be careful not to touch the printed face when removing the misfed media Make sure not to spill any toner inside the machine AN p Unfused toner can dirty your hands clothes or anything else it gets on If you accidentally get toner on your clothes lightly dust them off as best as you can If some toner remains on your clothes use cool not hot water to rinse the toner off If toner gets on your skin wash it off with cool water and a mild soap ANOO p If you get toner in your eyes wash it out immediately with cool water and consult a doctor If after clearing the media misfeed the misfeed message in the control panel window persists open and close the engine cover This should clear the mis feed message Media misfeed indications If a misfeed occurs during printing the message Misfeed detected appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen Media misfeed locations Page reference Media misfeed in Tray 2 page 13 7 Media misfeed in Tray 3 Tray 4 page 13 11 Media misfeed in the ADF page 13 13 Media misfeed in the duplex unit page 13 15 Media misfeed in the fuser unit page 13 16 Media misfeed in Tray 1 manual feed tray page 13 20 13 6 Clearing Media Misfeeds Clearing a Media Misfeed in Tray 2 1 Pull the lever and then open the right door Bey Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 2 Carefully pull out the misfed
326. s 10 14 Selecting with an index search cccecsesscsscseceecececeececseceecseeseeseeseeseeeeeeees 10 14 Selecting by searching for a destination type or NAME 0 ee eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 10 15 Directly typing in the address eceecescesceseecensecesceesceecescesceeceeeeeeseceeceaeeaeeaes 10 15 Selecting from the log 10 15 Selecting a program destination 10 16 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 17 Basic Scan to Folder operation ccccccescesesseeseesecseesceseeseeseeeeceeceeceaeeaeeaeeaeeneenee 10 17 Specifying document settings cccceseeeescescesceseeseesecsecsecaeeseeseeeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeaees 10 20 Simplex Duplex cceccesceesessesseescesceseeseeeceececeeceaeeaeeaeeaecaecaeeaaeaeeaeeeseeaeess 10 20 Original SiZe vo o ccdcccccceccevsesabeatcetestcsedeease deeds scuaee teu sdesdescsetsveussedvesiestege concen 10 20 Original Settings Separate Scan w 10 21 Original Settings Original Direction 10 21 Original Settings Orig Binding Position sss sssssessesessesssessesesseerssserse 10 22 x 12 Contents Color Mode sereni aa AEAEE VAV E K Er EANES 10 22 Original Type isccctesscescsccacsaecaccneenssacsneas cvs cvt ova daaceacscesevuchscebessceuce steele stdes caeave 10 23 Specifying scan settings cc cecceescescesceseeesceececeseeseaeaecaecaecaecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 10 23 Background Density cccececesses
327. s Thick Stock and Glossy Media 1 Pull out Tray 2 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place 3 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space between them 4 24 Loading Media 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded 5 Load the paper face up in the tray Bey Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time Loading Media 4 25 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper T Close Tray 2 8 Select Copy Paper Tray 2 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also Paper on page 7 5 4 26 Loading Media Tray 3 4 Optional Lower Feeder Unit Loading Plain Paper Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 3 or Tray 4 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place 3 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space between them Loading Media 4 27 4 Load the paper face up in the tray Bes Do not load above the t mark Up to 500 sheets 80 g m of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper 4 28 Loading Media 6 Close Tray 3 or Tray 4 T Select Copy Paper Tray 3 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then sel
328. s selected the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for long edge binding If Short Edge is selected the pages will be printed on both sides of the paper for short edge binding Copies Settings 1 to 9999 Default 1 Specify the number of copies to be printed Collate Settings ON OFF Select whether or not to enable collated sort printing Auto Tray Switching Settings ON OFF If ON is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper during printing a tray loaded with paper of the same size is automatically selected so printing can continue If OFF is selected and the specified tray runs out of paper printing stops User Settings 3 19 Tray Mapping Specify the Tray Mapping settings Tray Mapping Mode Settings ON OFF Select whether or not the Tray Mapping func tion is used Logical Tray 0 Logical Tray 9 Settings Physical Tray 1 Physical Tray 2 Physical Tray 3 Bes For Logical Tray 1 the default value is Physical Tray 1 Select the tray that is used for printing when a print job is received from another manufac turer s printer driver Print Reports Specify settings for printing the various reports Configuration Page Prints information and status of this machine Statistics Page Prints the statistics page
329. s still being misfed Check the media path inside the duplex again to make sure that you have removed all of the misfed media Solving Problems with Media Misfeeds 13 23 Symptom Cause Solution Media is mis The loaded document Load the correct document For details fed in the does not meet the on the documents that can be loaded ADF specifications refer to Documents that can be loaded into the ADF on page 4 34 The loaded document Load the document so that it does not exceeds the maxi exceed the maximum capacity For mum capacity details on the documents that can be loaded refer to Documents that can be loaded into the ADF on page 4 34 The document guides Slide the document guides against the were not slid against edges of the document For details on the edges of the doc loading the document refer to Load ument ing a document into the ADF on page 4 37 Media is mis The media is not cor Remove the misfed media and reposi feeding rectly positioned in tion the media properly in the tray the tray The number of sheets Remove the excess media and reload in the tray exceeds the correct number of sheets in the the maximum tray allowed The media guides are Adjust the media guides in the Tray 1 not correctly adjusted to match the size of the media to the media size Warped or wrinkled Remove the media smooth it out and
330. s the Utility Counter key 2 Press Address Registration 3 Press E mail Press New To view the information registered for a destination select the regis tered destination and then press Mode Check To delete the destina tion press Delete in the Mode Check screen 5 Enter the information for the destination and then press OK Item Description Name Type in the registration name for the address book destination up to 72 bytes E mail address Type in the E mail address of the recipient up to 320 characters Registering destinations 10 35 Favorites For frequently used destinations set to ON This displays the destination in the Favorites list allowing it to be found more easily Index Select the index characters that will be used to search for the destination 6 Press OK Registering Address Book SMB transmission d Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Address Registration 3 Press SMB Press New To view the information registered for a destination select the regis tered destination and then press Mode Check To delete the destina tion press Delete in the Mode Check screen 5 Enter the information for the destination and then press OK Item Description Name Type in the registration name for the address book destination up to 72 bytes Connection Specify Host Name File Path User Na
331. se agreement and then click Next 13 Click install 14 Click Finish Installation of the Data Administrator IC Card Plugin is completed which completes the setup User registration To register a user with Data Administrator the computer and this machine must be connected via network Also to proceed to register a card with Data Administrator the authentication device must be connected to the USB port of the computer When registering a user you can only enter the card ID and associate the user with card using the authentication device unit connected to this machine 1 Turn the main power switch on 15 4 Registering a user 2 To register a user and card with Data Administrator at a time connect the authentication device to the USB port of the computer that contains Data Administrator Bes Do not connect another USB device to the same port as for the authentication device Doing so reduces the USB power supply resulting in an operation failure Ees To use the USB hub be sure to connect the self power USB hub that supplies 500 mA or more Bes Restart the procedure 5 or more seconds after connecting the authen tication device 3 Data Administrator starts and device information of this machine is imported The Device Information window appears For details on how to import device information refer to the Data Administrator User s Guide 4 In Select Function select Authentication settings
332. sesseeecescesceecesceseeseaecaecaecaecaecaecnecaseaeenaeess 10 23 Resolution eee 10 24 File Settings File Type 10 24 File Settings Scan Setting 10 25 File Settings PDF Encrypt es sssesesssesesssrsessssssesersseseseseresesssssscsessssseseserere 10 25 Specifying the document name cece eeeeeesesceeceeceseeaecnecaecaecaecaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 10 26 Specifying communication SettIN gS cececeseesecseceececeeceeceeeneeeeetseeeeeseeeeeeees 10 27 URI Notification ioii esineen e E EE E E ia 10 27 URL Notification Destination 10 27 Specifying destinations csessesseeeees we 10 27 Selecting from registered destinations 10 27 Selecting from the Favorites list ccccsccscsscesceseeseesecsecsecseeseeaeeseeteeeeeeeees 10 28 Selecting with an index search ecesescceccseceeceseceececsecsecseeseeseeseeseeeeeeees 10 28 Selecting by searching for a destination type or NAME ce eeeseseeeeeeeeeees 10 28 Directly typing in the address eececeesceecesceseesencesceeseescescescesceeeeetsetseceaeeaeeaes 10 29 With FTP cece w 10 29 With PC SMB 10 29 With WebDAV 10 30 With USB Memory ccceeeeseeeeeees EEEE 10 30 With HDD ieaie ORENT 10 31 With Web Service Settings ccccecessessesecssceecseceececeacenceneeeseeseesenseeeeseees 10 31 Selecting from the log
333. smission Complete The line monitoring tone is produced until the fax transmission has been completed after dialing Line Monitor Volume Settings Low Medium High Select the volume of the line monitoring tone Ring Pattern Settings Normal Ring Double Triple 1 Triple 2 Select the ring pattern for faxing when RX Mode is set to DRPD Bes For details on the settings refer to Ring Pattern on page 4 4 Fax Settings Admin Settings 2 11 Item Description Manual RX V 34 OFF Settings Yes No Select whether or not V 34 is automatically turned off during manual reception Function Settings Item Description Inch Paper Priority Settings ON OFF Select whether or not paper sizes in inches are given priority when printing received documents Be The default setting is ON for 120V model and OFF for other models Paper Priority Settings Auto Select Fixed Size Size Priority Specify the priority for the paper drawers when print ing received documents Auto Select Selects the paper automatically Fixed Size Prints only on paper of the specified size Size Priority Prints on paper with the size given pri ority If no paper size has been given priority paper with the closest size is used for printing Print Paper Size
334. sor and may need to be adjusted m Press the four check points in the touch panel adjustment screen making sure that a sound is produced with each and then press the Start key E The check points can be pressed in any order E To reset the adjustment press the C key and then press the four check points again m To cancel the touch panel adjustment press the Stop key E f the touch panel cannot be adjusted contact the service representative Message Display Time Settings 3 sec 5 sec Specify the length of time for displaying warning mes sages which appear for example when an incorrect operation is performed LCD Brightness Settings 3 to 3 Default 0 Adjust the contrast of the touch panel Accessibility Meter Count From the Meter Count screen the page count for each function and the total page count can be viewed Meter Count Total Copy Print Scan Fax 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Meter Count 3 Press e gt 1 or to display the desired information Item Description Total Displays the total page count for each opera tion mode Copy Displays the page count for copy operations Print Displays the page count for print operations Scan Displays the page count for scan operations Fax Displays
335. ss book destinations per group can be registered Group destinations are registered from PageScope Web Connection For details on registering refer to the Reference Guide Program Destinations where faxes are frequently sent can be registered together with fax settings Scan Settings Comm Settings and Original Settings screens A registered program destination can be recalled by pressing the Mode Memory key in the control panel A maximum of 400 program destina tions can be registered For details on registering refer to Registering a program destination on page 6 6 6 2 Destination registration Registering an address book destination The procedure for registering an address book destination is described below G3 fax Address book destinations can be registered from the control panel of this machine or from PageScope Web Connection The following procedure describes how to register from the control panel of this machine Bes For details on registering from PageScope Web Connection refer to the Reference Guide Bes If Admin Settings Security Settings Security Details Manual Destination Input is set to Restrict a destination cannot be regis tered from the control panel and the user mode of PageScope Web Connection 1 Press the Utility Counter key 2 Press Address Registration 3 Press Fax Press New To view the information registered for a destination select t
336. st cceccessesseseeteesecsecseeaeeaeeneeneeneees 7 12 Fax Setup Information list ceceeescceecescesceseeseeeeseceeceecaecasesseaseaeecaecaeeseeaeeneees 7 12 Contents x 7 Other problems sssscccscssssssssssersessersessessessecssessessessesssessessessessessessessessessnseaseaseese 8 8 Error MESSAGES ssssessessesscsscssessesscsensensessessessessessessecssessessesssessessessessessessesseseasenseess 8 9 APPeCDIX E E E E A EET A 1 Technical specifications sesseseseseseesesesoeeesoseeoeeesosecoesesosseoeseccesesesoeeesesesoeeeseseroesesoseeee A 2 ERE h E A 2 Internet fax 0 A 2 PC fax Fax driver we A 3 EXC IMP UE sessi coiseccescscsotoostecsorsssessssess sari soso sodoossosonssssesassbesassaesasseeseoed vod osios tortos roe A 4 Entering COX esos vic ecs chccanavvadsestccaaeeseesncdnesnenstrsnsunes ddesvoatenseetens cosets sugeidnasersesneudenseovass A 4 x 8 Contents Introduction Machine Parts The parts of the machine referred to throughout this manual are illustrated below Please take some time to become familiar with them Front View 1 Control panel 2 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 2 a ADF feed cover 2 b Document guide 2 c Document feed tray 2 d Document output tray 2 e Document stopper USB HOST port Tray 1 Manual feed tray Tray 2 Output tray Scanner lock lever Original glass Original cover pad O ON Dok OQ 0 S
337. sults can be viewed of the last 100 transmissions receptions Transmission results and reception results are printed separately The Activity Report is printed automatically With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report Activity Report the conditions for printing can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 Items that are printed Item Description No Shows the communication number Destination Shows the registration name or address of the destination Start Time Shows the time that communication began Time Shows the length of time required for communica tion Prints Shows the number of pages sent received Result Shows the communication results For details check the margin of the report Note Shows remarks regarding the communication For details check the margin of the report 7 6 Printing reports lists TX Result Report This report provides a record of the transmission results If necessary a reduced image of the first page of the sent document can be printed in the report The TX Result Report is printed automatically when transmission is com pleted Bes With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report TX Result Report the conditions for printing can be specified For details refer to Fax Report on page 2 18 With Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Report TX Result Report Im
338. t Address Start Number Book Number of Addresses List Output Group Start Number Address Number of Addresses List Output 3 24 Admin Settings _ Authentica User List Dis tion Setting play Setting Logout Confirmation Display Card Authen tication Ethernet TCP IP Enable IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DHCP BOOTP ARP PING HTTP FTP Telnet Bonjour Dynamic DNS IPP RAW Port Enable Bidirectional Admin Settings 3 25 _ SLP _ SMTP _ SNMP WSD Print IPSec IP Address Permit Filter Access Deny Access IPv6 Enable _ Netware _ AppleTalk Network Speed _ IEEE802 1X Binary Division Auto Setting Link Local Global Address Gateway Address 3 26 Admin Settings omme
339. t as the ori entation of the document loaded into the ADF or placed on the original glass Density Specify the copy density Item Description EH Adjust the copy density to one of nine levels Standard Select this setting to return the copy density to the standard setting Density Original Type Select the document quality text or image documents Item Description Text Select this setting when copying documents con taining only text Text Photo Select this setting when copying documents con taining both text and photos Black text color text and shading are automatically recognized and the most appropriate image pro cessing is performed In addition processing appropriate for printed photo documents will be applied to any photos Photo Select this setting when copying documents con taining printed photos Color Mode Specify the printing color used for copies Copies will be printed with the specified Color setting when the Start Color key is pressed Item Description Auto Select this setting to detect whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white then automatically print copies in either color or black and white Full Color Select this setting to print the copy in full color regardless of whether the scanned document is in color or in black and white Original Type
340. t Legal 16K 4x6 Kai 16 Kai 32 Env C6 Env DL Env Monarch Env Chou 3 Env Chou 4 B5 ISO Env 10 J Postcard J Postcard D 8 1 8x13 1 4 8 1 2x13 1 2 Custom Size Select the size of paper loaded in the selected tray Be The default setting is Letter for 120V model and A4 for other models Bes With Tray 2 Env C6 Env DL Env Monarch Env Chou 3 Env Chou 4 B5 ISO Env 10 do not appear Bes With Tray 3 and Tray 4 only Letter Legal Govt Legal Executive A4 and B5 JIS appear Custom Size Press Width and Length and then type in the paper size Be These settings can be specified if Paper Size is set to Custom Be Settings for Custom Size cannot be specified for Tray 3 and Tray 4 3 18 User Settings Paper Type Settings Any Plain Paper Recycled Thick 1 Thick 2 Label Enve lope Postcard Letterhead Glossy 1 Glossy 2 1 Side Only Special Paper Select the type of paper loaded in the selected tray Bes Envelope appears only with Tray 1 Be With Tray 3 and Tray 4 only Any Plain Paper Recycled 1 Side Only and Special Paper appear Duplex Settings OFF Long Edge Short Edge Select whether pages are printed double sided If Long Edge i
341. t it from direct sunlight Do not tilt removed toner cartridge otherwise toner may spill Do not tilt removed waste toner box otherwise waste toner may spill Replacing Consumables 11 25 Bes Before opening the right right door 4 Pull the lever and then open the door fold up Tray 1 the unit in the direction of the arrow until it stops 5 Remove the top part of the right door 6 Insert the protective sheet into Replacing Consumables 11 26 T Push down the guides 8 Hold the handles and then care fully pull out the transfer belt unit Bey Be sure to keep the S D S 2 ag Nn L wn S S E QS So 5 oa 8 g Be S 9 Prepare a new transfer belt unit Be careful not to touch the surface of the belt Bx Bx 3 gt rs s Q S g S Q Q S gt 2 11 27 Replacing Consumables 1 0 Remove the protective cover from the new transfer belt unit Bes Fully insert it until it locks into place Bes Be sure to keep the Sa Cc D a g wn Cc g o a c eo oc a transfer belt level other wise the transfer belt may be scratched 1 2 Push up the guides Replacing Consumables 11 28 1 3 Pull out the protective sheet 1 4 Install the top part of the right N D EN O SA Ih PRs door
342. ta Administrator User Manual on the Applications CD DVD PageScope Direct Print This application provides functions for sending PDF and TIFF files directly to a printer to be printed For details refer to the PageScope Direct Print User s Guide on the Appli cations CD DVD 1 10 Getting Acquainted with Your Machine PageScope Enterprise Suite Plug In This plug in provides the additional functions of PageScope Enterprise Suite which enables centralized man agement of devices and permission management Getting Acquainted with Your Machine 1 11 Documentation CD DVD Documentation Documentation Use Benefit Installation Guide This manual provides installation details that must be performed in order to use this machine such as setting up the machine and installing the drivers Printer Copier Scanner User s Guide this manual This manual provides details on gen eral daily operations such as using the drivers and control panel and replacing consumables Facsimile User s Guide This manual provides details on gen eral fax operations such as sending and receiving faxes and using the control panel Reference Guide This manual provides details on installing the Macintosh and Linux drivers and on specifying settings for the network Quick Guide This manual provides an introduction to and illustrations for basic machine operations and
343. tart key The document is scanned and transmission begins Bes In order to select a program destination the program destination must first be registered on the machine For details refer to Registering a program destination on page 6 6 When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations the document cannot be sent with the Super Fine Resolution setting 400 x 400 dpi When the broadcast transmission destinations include both G3 fax and Internet fax destinations the timer transmission function cannot be used Selecting a program destination 3 21 Faxing manually G3 fax If a fax is sent manually the status of the recipient can be confirmed before the fax is sent In order to send a fax manually the following requirements must be met E The document cannot be divided and scanned separately If the original glass is being used the document being sent can contain only one page E F code transmissions timer transmissions password transmissions and polling reception are not being performed Automatic redialing cannot be used E Multiple destinations cannot be specified The procedure for a manual transmission with Off Hook pressed is described below es If Admin Settings Fax Settings Fax Function Settings Cofirm Adar TX is set to ON Off Hook cannot be used Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen
344. tent RGB Gray Destination Profile Simulation Simulation Profile Sim Intent CMYK Gray Admin Settings 3 29 Gradation Tone Adjustment Calibration AIDC Process CMYK Cyan Density Highlight Middle Shadow Magenta Highlight Middle Shadow Yellow Highlight Middle Shadow Black Highlight Middle Shadow 3 30 Admin Settings Color Separation Emulation Default Emulation PS Wait Timeout Print PS Errors PS Protocol Auto Trapping Black Overprint PCL CR LF Mapping Line Page Font Setting Font Number _ Pitch Size _ Symbol Set XPS Digital Signature Print XPS Errors Fax Settings Sender Sender Settings Sender Fax No Admin Settings 3 31 Header Footer Settings Header Position Fax TX Header Name Footer Position Comm Settings PB DP RX Mode N
345. than 10 within an hour Power supply 120 V 60 Hz 220 to 240 V 50 to 60 Hz Power consumption 120 V 1200 W or less 220 to 240 V 1300 W or less Power Save mode 34 W or less Amperage 120 V 10 9 A or less 220 to 240 V 4 8 A or less Acoustic Noise Printing 55 dB or less Copying 57 dB or less Standby 39 dB or less Technical specifications External dimensions Height 550 mm 21 7 Width 530 mm 20 9 Depth 508 mm 20 Bes Excluding some protruding parts and the manual feed tray Weight Approximately 34 6 kg 76 3 Ib without consum ables Approximately 39 0 kg 86 0 Ib with consumables Interface USB 2 0 High Speed compliant 10Base T 100Base TX 1000Base T Ethernet Host USB USB device printing Standard memory 1536 MB Hard disk 120 GB Machine life Maximum 400 000 pages and no more than 5 years Technical specifications Consumable Life Expectancy Chart User Replaceable Item Average Life Expectancy Toner cartridge Standard in box Cartridge 6 000 pages or more continuous Replacement Cartridge High Capacity 6 000 pages or more continuous Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 Be The toner cartridge life will be shorter when using intermittent printing Imaging unit 30 000 pages continuous 20 000 pages 2 pages per job Waste toner bottle 36 000 pages monochrome
346. the recipient is to incur the cost of the call Polling reception can be performed to receive a normal fax or to receive a fax by specifying the sender s bulletin board Ees This function cannot be used together with ECM OFF V34 OFF pass word transmissions timer transmissions F code transmissions or Internet fax transmissions Bz Multiple destinations cannot be specified Performing a polling reception The procedure for using polling reception is described below Press Fax or press the Fax key to display the initial Fax screen Specify the destination Press Settings Press Comm Settings Press Comm Method Press Polling RX Select the reception method NOORONM To perform normal polling reception press Polling RX To specify a sender s bulletin board for polling reception press Bulle tin and then use the keypad to type in the sender s bulletin board number If information was incorrectly entered press the C key to erase the entered information 8 Press OK 9 Press the Start key Polling reception begins Useful reception functions Memory reception G3 fax Internet fax Memory reception is the function for saving received documents in the machine s memory Documents saved in the memory can be printed or retrieved In order to use memory reception the following settings in the Fax Settings screen Admin Settings must be specified E Set
347. the scan image m Close Click to close the TWAIN driver window m Prescan Click to begin scanning a preview image m Scan Click to begin scanning Clear icon Click to erase the preview image When Advanced Mode is selected The following parameters can be set when Advanced Mode is selected m Load Specify a saved settings file dat file for scanning E Save Save the current settings as a settings file dat file m Default Return all settings to their defaults Help icon Click to display the Help m About icon Click to display the software version information m Paper source Specify the paper source With scanning documents from the ADF select whether to scan only the front side or both sides of the document Em Original Size Specify the original size m Scan Type Specify the scan type Windows TWAIN Driver Settings m Resolution Specify the resolution m Scale Specify the enlargement or reduction ratio for the selected area Bes If the resolution is set at 1200 x 1200dpi or higher a setting larger than 100 cannot be specified E Scanning Mode Select Auto or Manual When Manual is selected a tab appears so that detailed settings can be specified for example for Brightness Contrast Fil ter Curves Levels Color Balance and Hue Saturation Bes The parameters that can be set differ depending on the scanning mode that is selected B
348. then open the right door Bes Before opening the right door fold up Tray 1 2 While pushing the levers to the inside move the roller presser toward you 11 22 Replacing Consumables 3 While continuing to press the levers remove the transfer roller 4 Prepare a new transfer roller 5 While pressing the levers insert the shaft of the transfer roller into the bearings 6 Move the levers away from you until it snaps into place 11 23 Replacing Consumables T Close the right door 8 Reset the counter in the Admin Settings Maintenance Menu Supplies Consumables Replace Transfer Roller Unit menu Replacing the Transfer Belt Unit When the time to replace the transfer belt unit is reached the message Replace image transfer belt appears Printing can continue even after this message appears however since the print quality is reduced the transfer belt unit should be replaced immediately 1 Turn off the machine and discon nect the power cord and inter face cover 11 24 Replacing Consumables 2 Open the machine s front cover 3 Remove the all toner cartridges all imaging units and waste toner bottle Be For details on removing the toner cartridges imaging units or waste toner bottle refer to Replacing a Toner Car tridge on page 11 6 or Replacing a Imaging Unit on page 11 11 Cover the removed imag ing unit to protec
349. tion Prepara tion Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select if sounds are to be produced when machine preparations are finished Caution Sound Select if sounds are to be produced when cautions occur Low Caution Sound Level 1 Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when a mes sage appears in the touch panel warning that it is almost time to replace consumables or a replaceable part Low Caution Sound Level 2 Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when the user performs an incorrect operation Low Caution Sound Level 3 Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that can be corrected by the user by referring to the message that appeared or the User s Guide Severe Caution Sound Settings Enable ON OFF Volume Low Medium High Select whether sounds are produced when an error occurs that cannot be corrected by the user or requires a service representative Accessibility Touch Panel Adujstment If the touch panel buttons do not respond correctly the position of buttons in the touch panel may not be correctly aligned with the position of the actual touch sen
350. to the RGB source profile Absolute Color Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile RGB Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K Gray K Bk K Gray CMYK Select how black and grays are reproduced in RGB graphics data Bk CMYK Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYk Black is reproduced using only black 3 58 Admin Settings Destination Pro file Settings Auto Select the destination profile Auto A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching halftones and other profiles Destination profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile Simulation Specify settings for the simulation profile Simulation Pro file Settings NONE SWOP Euroscale CommercialPress JapanColor TOYO DIC Select the simulation profile If NONE is selected no simulation profile is specified Simulation profiles downloaded with Download Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Simulation Profile Sim Intent Settings Relative Color Absolute Color Select the characteristic applied to the simula tion profile Relative Color Relative color is appli
351. ttach the wrist strap to any piece of equipment with an electrical current present Plastic rubber wood painted metal surfaces and telephones are not acceptable grounding points If you don t have an antistatic wrist strap discharge your body s static electric charge by touching a grounded surface before you handle any printer boards or components Also avoid walking around after grounding yourself 11 40 Antistatic Protection Maintenance Maintaining the machine AN CATON p Read all caution and warning labels carefully making sure to follow any instructions contained in them These labels are located on the inside of the machine s covers and the interior of the machine body Handle the machine with care to preserve its life Abuse handling may cause damage and void your warranty If dust and paper scraps remain on the inside or outside of the machine machine performance and print quality will suffer so the machine should be cleaned periodically Keep the following guidelines in mind N Gp Turn off the machine unplug the power cord and disconnect all interface cables before cleaning Do not spill water or detergent into the machine otherwise the machine will be damaged and an electric shock may occur YANN CAUTION The fuser unit is hot When the right door is opened the fuser unit temperature drops gradually one hour wait time A Be careful when cleaning the inside of the machine or removi
352. ty Specify the appropriate image quality settings for the document Item Description Background Removal Select the density of the background color at which documents with a background color are to be scanned Nine density levels are available for the background color Density Select the density at which the document is to be scanned Nine density levels are available Select the appropriate density setting according to your document Sharpness Select the strength of outlines for example on characters and lines for scanning the docu ment To scan characters and lines with greater sharpness select a setting in the direction Seven sharpness levels are available Resolution Select the resolution at which the document is to be scanned Item Description 150x150dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 150 x 150 dpi 200x200dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 200 x 200 dpi 300x300dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 300 x 300 dpi 600x600dpi Select this setting to scan the document at 600 x 600 dpi 300x300dpi Bez A finer scan has more information to be sent therefore the transmis sion time increases Be If File Type is set to Compact PDF Resolution can only be set to 10 8 Performing Scan to E mail mode operations File Settings File Type Select the file format for the scan data to be saved Item Desc
353. u rity settings If ON is selected the enhanced security settings are applied HDD Settings Check the capacity of the hard disk or delete data by overwriting Check HDD Capacity Check the total capacity of the hard disk the amount of space used and the amount of space available Overwrite All Data Delete all data on the hard disk by overwriting it Admin Settings 3 71 Mode Settings Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 Mode 4 Mode 5 Mode 6 Mode 7 Mode 8 Select the method for overwriting the data on the hard disk Mode 1 Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 2 Overwritten with 1 byte random num bers Overwritten with 1 byte random num bers Overwritten with 0x00 Mode 3 Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Overwritten with 1 byte random numbers Verified Mode 4 Overwritten with 1 byte random num bers Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Mode 5 Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwrit ten with Oxff Mode 6 Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwrit ten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Over written with Oxff Overwritten with specified 512 byte data Mode 7 Overwritten with 0x00 Overwritten with Oxff Overwritten with 0x00 Overwrit ten with Oxff Overwritten with
354. uired to change the permissions for a document up to 32 characters 10 10 Performing Scan to E mail mode operations Item Description Details If encryption has been enabled detailed permission settings can be specified Bes This appears only if Encryption Level is set to Yes and a password has been specified for Document Permissions Printing Allowed Select whether to allow the data to be printed Allow to prohibit printing Restrict or to allow printing only at a low resolution Low Resolution Changes Allowed Select whether to allow or prohibit docu ment editing such as signing entering text and annotating the data and select the permission level if it is allowed Level 1 Pages can be inserted deleted and rotated Level 2 Annotations can be created data can be entered in form fields and sig natures can be added to existing signature fields Level 3 All operations except page extracting can be performed Level 4 Data can be entered in form fields and signatures can be added to existing signature fields Level 5 The page layout can be changed data can be entered in form fields and signatures can be added to existing signature fields Ees Levels 1 2 3 and 5 appear only when Encryption Level is set to Low Levels 1 2 3 and 4 appear when Encryption Level is set to Middle or High Enable Copy ing
355. umber of RX Call Rings Redial Redial Interval Line Monitor Line Monitor Volume Ring Pattern Manual RX V 34 OFF 3 32 Admin Settings Function Settings Inch Paper Priority Paper Priority Print Paper Size Tray Selection for RX Print Min Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages Duplex Print RX Fax Function Settings F Code TX Dest Check Display Func Confirm Addr TX Confirm Addr Register Restrict Fax TX Restrict Fax RX Restrict PC Fax TX Restrict Internet Fax TX Restrict Internet Fax RX Memory RX Memory RX Password Admin Settings 3 33 Closed Net Enable work RX Password Password Forward TX Forward TX Settings Setting Forwarding Address Forward amp Print Remote RX Remote RX Settings Enabled Remote RX No PC Fax RX PC Fax RX Settings Setting PC Fax RX Print Nighttime RX Night Fax RX Setti
356. unctions G3 fax Specifying e mail Internet fax settings With E mail Settings in the Comm Settings screen specify the file name subject From address and body text for sending Internet fax e mail mes sages Item Description File Name Type in the document name for the scan data Subject Type in the subject for e mail messages Subject text registered with PageScope Web Con nection can also be selected From Specify the sender s address Select Administrator E mail Addr or User Address or type it in directly Administrator E mail Addr can be selected if the administrator e mail address has been registered User Address can be selected if an e mail address has been registered for the currently authenticated user Body Type in the body text for the e mail message Body text registered with PageScope Web Con nection can also be selected Bes For details on registering information from PageScope Web Connec tion refer to the Reference Guide Specifying e mail Internet fax settings 3 17 Specifying document settings From the Original Settings screen settings can be specified for the docu ment to be faxed Original Size Specify the size of the document that is to be faxed Item Description Standard Size When sending a document of a standard size press Standard Size and then select the docu ment size
357. und Press Standard to return the density to the standard setting Contrast The image can be adjusted to make it softer or sharper Adjust the contrast to one of nine levels Select a setting in the direction to make the image sharper or select a setting in the direction to make the image softer Press Std to return the contrast to the standard setting Sharpness The sharpness of text and image outlines can be adjusted Adjust the sharpness to one of seven levels Select a setting in the direction to increase the sharp ness or select a setting in the direction to decrease the sharpness Press Std to return the sharpness to the standard setting Image Quality 7 15 7 16 Image Quality Additional copy operations Interrupting a copy job The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be copied with different copy settings This is convenient for quickly making a copy Bes The Interrupt key cannot be pressed while a document is being scanned Bey When the Interrupt key is pressed the copy settings return to their defaults 1 In the home screen press Copy 2 Place the document on the original glass or load it into the ADF Bes For details on positioning the document refer to Placing a document on the original glass on page 4 36 and Loading a document into the ADF on page 4 37 3 Press the Interrupt key The
358. unicating with this machine and read the information from the address book click Get Addr Info To search for recipients by specifying conditions click Find 3 Select the name of a recipient name under Address Book and then click Add Recipients To send a fax to multiple recipients continue adding them in the same way Up to 100 recipients can be registered To delete a recipient added under Recipient List select the name of the recipient to be deleted and then click Delete From List 4 Click OK The FAX Transmission Popup dialog box appears again with the speci fied names added under Recipient List Specifying transmission conditions By clicking Fax Mode Setting Details in the FAX Transmission Popup dia log box the transmission conditions for the PC fax can be specified Item Description Print Recipient File Select this check box to print the original document after a fax is sent Timer Send Specify the transmission time Click Reflect Cur rent Time to add the current time set on the com puter to the Send Time box Sending a PC fax Item Description SUB Address If the fax is to be sent using F codes specify the SUB address up to 20 digits Sender ID If the fax is to be sent using F codes specify the sender ID up to 20 digits including numbers and Bez When faxing with a timer transmission make sure that the
359. urn to the home screen 1 8 Touch panel Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages press T Jor to select a different page If values appear between f and the current page number total number of pages is indicated If there are tabs that are not displayed press or to select a different tab Press to adjust the image quality during a copy scan or fax operation Press or to change the entered value Press when an error occurs to view the error message Press to display descriptions of the various functions A description of the current screen will be displayed Press to display the address book From this screen you can select single destinations and group destinations regis tered in the address book Appears while scanning and printing when making copies Appears while scanning with fax transmission and scanning operations ROE ES ew ee ee BE Appears while printing with PC printing received fax printing and report printing Touch panel Icon Description E Appears when using a G3 fax connection N m kT i Appears when there are documents queued for a timer transmission Appears when there are fax documents received with mem ory reception or PC faxing Appears when data or documents are being sent from this unit App
360. user 2 External Mem Press to print files on a USB memory device ory File List Select the file to be printed In addition print settings can be specified File Type Select the type of files to be displayed 3 ID amp Print Press to print a print job sent as a registered user or public user Login User Press to display and print a job of the user who is currently logged in Public User Press to display and print a job of a public user 4 a Press to return to the home screen Ees For details on the Proof Print function refer to Proof Print on page 6 2 Ees For details on the External Memory Print function refer to External Memory on page 6 3 Bes For details on the ID amp Print function refer to ID amp Print on page 6 4 2 12 Touch panel screens Keys and icons that appear in the screens Icon Description If the screen has multiple pages press 7 or to select a dif ferent page If values appear between f and the current page num ber total number of pages is indicated If there are tabs that are not displayed press lt or to select a different tab Press to adjust the image quality during a copy scan or fax operation Press or to change the entered value Press to view the error message when an error occurs Press to display descriptions of the various
361. using the CMYK colors Bk K Gray k Black and gray are reproduced using black only Bk K Gray CMYkK Black is reproduced using only black Destination Pro file Settings Auto Select the destination profile Auto A destination profile that the machine automatically adapts is selected based on a combination of the specified color matching halftones and other profiles Destination profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as Destination Profile Text Printing Specify settings for RGB text data RGB Source Settings Device Color SRGB AppleRGB AdobeRGB1998 ColorMatchRGB BlueAdjus tRGB Select the color space for RGB text data If Device Color is selected no color space is specified RGB source profiles downloaded with Down load Manager or PageScope Web Connection are available as RGB Source 3 56 Admin Settings RGB Intent Settings Vivid Photographic Relative Color Absolute Color Select the characteristic applied when convert ing RGB text data to CMYK data Vivid A vivid output is produced Photographic A brighter output is produced Relative Color Relative color is applied to the RGB source profile Absolute Color Absolute color is applied to the RGB source profile RGB Gray Settings Bk CMYK Gray CMYK Bk K G
362. utomatically detect the size of an original docu ment that will be scanned Before scanning the document specify its size If the size of the original document is not correctly specified some parts of the image may be lost For details on specifying the size of an original document refer to Original Size on page 10 20 10 18 Performing Scan to Folder mode operations Bes If the memory becomes full while the document is being scanned scanning cannot continue To send the document pages that have already been scanned press the Start key To stop the transmission press the Stop key Be To check a scan job press Job and then press Save in the Log screen Performing Scan to Folder mode operations 10 19 Specifying document settings The Simplex Duplex Original Size Original Settings Color Mode and Original Type parameters available from the Settings screen can be used to specify document settings Simplex Duplex Select whether double sided documents are to be scanned when the ADF is used Item Description 1 sided Select this setting when scanning a single sided document 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document Cover 2 sided Select this setting when scanning a double sided document with a cover page Only the front side of the cover page will be scanned and then both the front and back sides of the remain ing pages will be scann
363. ved when V4 x is installed 2 Click Plug in version In Plug in information list confirm the plugin version of Data Administra tor This software is available if the plugin version is 4 x Setup 1 Turn the Main Power Switch of this machine off and disconnect the authentication device from this machine Registering a user 15 3 NO Install IC Card Driver USB Driver Connect the authentication device to the USB port of your computer The Found New Hardware dialog box appears Select Locate and install driver software recommended Insert the application CD ROM provided with the authentication device into the CD ROM drive of the computer Click the Browse my computer for driver software advanced Oo Bo Check that the driver s search location is the application CD ROM and then click Next When the driver s search location is not the application CD ROM click Browse Select the IC Card Driver USB Driver folder in the CD ROM and click OK Installation starts T Click Close Installation of the IC Card Driver USB Driver is completed 8 Install Data Administrator IC Card Plugin Open the IC_Card_Plugin folder on the application CD ROM and then click setup exe 9 Select a language and then click OK The installation program starts 1 0 Follow the on screen instructions to proceed with the installation 11 Click Next 1 2 Select I accept the terms in the licen
364. ween them Loading Media 4 19 3 Press down on the center of the paper lifting plate until the left and right locking tabs white lock into place 4 Load the media face down in the tray Bes Up to 20 sheets can be loaded into the tray at one time 5 Slide the media guides against the edges of the media 6 Select Copy Paper Tray 1 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also Paper on page 7 5 4 20 Loading Media Tray 2 Loading Plain Paper Single Side Only and Special Paper 1 Pull out Tray 2 2 Press down the media pressure plate to lock it into place 3 Slide the media guides to pro vide more space between them Loading Media 4 21 4 Turn the paper selection dial to select the size of paper to be loaded 5 Load the paper face up in the tray Bes Do not load above the t mark Up to 250 sheets 80 g m of plain paper can be loaded into the tray at one time 4 22 Loading Media 6 Slide the media guides against the edges of the paper T Close Tray 2 8 Select Copy Paper Tray 2 Change Tray Set Paper Size and Paper Type in the configuration menu and then select the setting for the size and type of paper that are loaded See also Paper on page 7 5 Loading Media 4 23 Loading Label Sheets Letterhead Postcard
365. y Repeat this step until all document pages have been scanned O After all pages of the document have been scanned press Finish Performing Scan to E mail mode operations 10 5 Original Settings Original Direction Specify the orientation of the document Item Description Top Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the top Bottom Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the bottom Left Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the left at the right when placed on the original glass Right Select this setting when the document is loaded with its top edge at the right at the left when placed on the original glass Original Settings Orig Binding Position Specify the binding position when scanning a double sided document using the ADF The orientation of the back sides of the pages differs depending on whether the double sided document will be bound at the top or at the left Item Description Left Bind Select this setting to specify a binding position at the left Top Bind Select this setting to specify a binding position at the top Auto Select this setting to automatically specify the binding position If the document length is 297 mm 11 69 inches or less a binding position along the long side of the paper is selected If the document length is more
366. y be due to incorrect registration of IC card information Register IC card information again m Press Device Authentication to log in by specifying the user name and password for User Name and Password without using the authentication device 1 Press Authentication Device 2 Press Access Basic Screen For ID amp Print jobs press Begin printing to authenticate the user and start printing 3 Place the IC card on the authentication device Bez For details on how to register an IC card for the user refer to Authen tication device IC card type on page 15 1 With account track 1 Specify an account and password for Account and Password Press Login If authentication was successful the functions of this machine can be used 2 16 User authentication and account track Utility Settings 3 Accessibility From the Accessibility screen various settings can be specified for the dis played screens and the operation of control panel keys Accessibility Key Repeat Time to Start Interval Key Interval Sound Set Set All Enable tings Volume Operation Input Confir Enable Confirmation mation Sound Volume Invalid Input Enable Sound

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Samsung M197DF User Manual    LED照明  製品安全データシート - クミアイ化学工業株式会社  Model Alpha 4314 - Valhalla Scientific, Inc  Spirit industrial wmi 220  Manuale Tecnico Sensepoint XCD RFD  取扱説明書  gps NC750  ハイブローノズル 取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file